2007 Cadillac STS/STS-V Owner Manual MIndex A good place to quickly locate information about the...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 14Safety Belts ............................................ 15Child Restraints ...................................... 38Airbag System ........................................ 64Restraint System Check ......................... 80

Features and Controls ................................ 83Keys ....................................................... 85Doors and Locks .................................... 98Windows ............................................... 104Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 107Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 111Mirrors .................................................. 127OnStar® System ................................... 132Universal Home Remote System .......... 135Storage Areas ...................................... 146Sunroof ................................................ 147Vehicle Personalization ......................... 148

Instrument Panel ....................................... 175Instrument Panel Overview ................... 178Climate Controls ................................... 230Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 241Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 258Audio System(s) ................................... 280

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 315Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 316Towing ................................................. 355

Service and Appearance Care .................. 359Service ................................................. 362Fuel ...................................................... 365Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 372All-Wheel Drive ..................................... 414Rear Axle ............................................. 416Front Axle ............................................ 417Bulb Replacement ................................ 417

2007 Cadillac STS/STS-V Owner Manual M

1

Windshield Replacement ....................... 419Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement ..................................... 419Tires ..................................................... 421Appearance Care .................................. 476Vehicle Identification ............................. 485Electrical System .................................. 486Capacities and Specifications ................ 498

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 501Maintenance Schedule .......................... 502

Customer Assistance Information ............. 525Customer Assistance and

Information ........................................ 526Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 542

Index .......................................................... 545

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, andthe name STS are registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes in the product after that timewithout notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “General Motors of CanadaLimited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division wheneverit appears in this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle maynot have all of them. For example, more than

one entertainment system may be offered oryour vehicle may have been ordered withouta front passenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15864563 A First Print ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in differentcolors or in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Power Seats ................................................. 9Power Lumbar .............................................. 9Heated Seats .............................................. 10Heated and Ventilated Seats ....................... 11Power Reclining Seatbacks ......................... 11Head Restraints .......................................... 13

Rear Seats .................................................... 14Heated Seats .............................................. 14Rear Seat Pass-Through Door .................... 14

Safety Belts .................................................. 15Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 15Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 19How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 20Driver Position ............................................. 21Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 29

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 30Right Front Passenger Position ................... 30Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 31Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 34Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 37Safety Belt Extender ................................... 37

Child Restraints ............................................ 38Older Children ............................................. 38Infants and Young Children ......................... 40Child Restraint Systems .............................. 44Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 48Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 50Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ........................................... 57Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 59

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 64Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 66When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 70What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 71How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 72What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 72Passenger Sensing System ......................... 74

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 78Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 79Restraint System Check ............................... 80

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 80Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 81

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Power SeatsThe power seatcontrols are locatedon the outboard sideof the seats.

To adjust the seat, do any of the following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe horizontal control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the horizontalcontrol up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the horizontalcontrol up or down.

• Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 11.

If your vehicle has the memory feature, you canprogram and recall memory settings for seatpositions. See Memory Seat, Mirrors andSteering Wheel on page 169.

Power LumbarYour vehicle’s seats may be equipped withpower lumbar.

You can increase ordecrease lumbarsupport in an area ofthe lower seatback withthis control, locatedon the outboard sidesof the front seat(s).

To increase support, press and hold the frontof the control. To decrease support, press andhold the rear of the control. Let go of the controlwhen the lower seatback reaches the desiredlevel of support.

9

To raise the position of the lumbar support, pressand hold the top of the control. To lower theposition of lumbar support, press and hold thebottom of the control. Let go of the control whenthe lower seatback reaches the desired levelof support.

Your vehicle may have a memory function whichallows seat settings to be saved and recalled.See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel onpage 169 for more information.

Heated SeatsYour vehicle may haveheated front seats.The buttons are locatedon the climate controlpanel.

z (Heated Seat and Seatback): This button isfor the heated seat and seatback. Press theup arrow once to turn on the heated seat at thehighest setting. Press the down arrow once to turnon the heated seat at the lowest setting.

Pressing the up or down arrows a second time willraise or lower the setting. To turn off the heatedseat keep pressing the down arrow until theindicator for heated seat on the climate controldisplay is off.

A light bar in the climate control display shows thesetting: high, medium, or low. The longest barshows the high range and the shortest bar showsthe low range.

The heated seat will automatically shut off whenthe vehicle is turned off.

10

Heated and Ventilated Seats

Your vehicle may haveheated and ventilatedfront seats. The buttonsare located on theclimate control panel.

z (Heated Seat and Seatback): This part of thebutton is for the heated seat and seatback.

{ (Ventilated Seat): This part of the button is forthe ventilated seat.

There are three settings for each feature. A light barin the climate control display shows the setting;high, medium or low. The longest bar showsthe high range and the shortest bar shows thelow range.

Pressing either the heated seat or ventilated partof the seat button will start that feature at thehighest setting. Each time you press the button,the feature will decrease one setting.To turn the feature off, keep pressing the buttonuntil the display lights turn off.The heated or ventilated seats will automaticallyshut off when the vehicle is turned off.

Power Reclining SeatbacksThe front seats havepower recliningseatbacks. Use thevertical power seatcontrol located on theoutboard side of theseat to operate them.

• To recline the seatback, press the controltoward the rear of the vehicle.

• To raise the seatback, press the control towardthe front of the vehicle.

11

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash,you could go into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright. Thensit well back in the seat and wear yoursafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.

12

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it. To lowerthe head restraint,press the button,located on the top of theseatback, and pushthe head restraint down.

The front head restraints can also tilt forwardor rearward.

13

Rear Seats

Heated Seats

Your vehicle may have this feature. The buttonsused to control the heated rear seats arelocated on the back of the center console.The engine must be running for the heatedseat feature to work.

z (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press thisbutton to turn the heated seat feature on. Whenyou press the button, the feature will turn on at thehighest setting. Each time you press the button,the feature will go down one temperature setting.A light next to the button will indicate thesetting; 3 is the highest, 1 is the lowest. To turnthe feature off, keep pressing the button untilthe indicator light goes off.

The heated rear seats will shut off automaticallywhen the ignition is turned off.

Rear Seat Pass-Through DoorYour vehicle has a pass-through door that providesaccess to the trunk from the rear seats. See“Rear Seat Pass-Through Door” under Trunk onpage 101.

14

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts. SeeSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 243 andPassenger Safety Belt Reminder Light onpage 244.

15

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

16

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

17

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

18

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle andget out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

19

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect you fromthings beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of lessthan 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And there aredifferent rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 38 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 40. Follow those rules for everyone’sprotection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

20

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is howto wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 37.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 29.

21

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

7. This safety belt has a feature that will reducethe tension of the safety belt on the occupant’sshoulder if the vehicle is on. To set thisfeature, gently pull on the belt, or lean forwardand then sit back. The belt will retract andrest lightly against the occupant.

22

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

23

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

24


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give asmuch protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

25


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

26


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the shoulder atall times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

27


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

28

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on thebuckle. When the safety belt is unbuckled or whenthe vehicle is turned off, the tension reducer willdeactivate. The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt isout of the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down, pressthe release button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition. You can movethe height adjuster upjust by pushing up on theshoulder belt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pressing therelease button to make sure it has locked intoposition.

29

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it ismore likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key tomaking safety belts effective is wearing themproperly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 21.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

30

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

you. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

31

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure itis secure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 37.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

32

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.

And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

33

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outboard passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between theedge of the seatback and the interior bodyto remove the guide from its storage clip.

34

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then, placethe guide over the belt and insert the two edgesof the belt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

35

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 31. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Pull the guide upward toexpose its storage clip, and then slide theguide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inwardand slide them in between the seatback andthe interior body, leaving only the loop ofthe elastic cord exposed.

36

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontaland near frontal crash if the threshold conditionsfor pretensioner activation are met. And, ifyour vehicle has side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in aside crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 81.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

37

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt shouldfit snugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or canbe thrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

38

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 34. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

39

{CAUTION:

Never do this.Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears the beltin this way, in a crash the child might slideunder the belt. The belt’s force would thenbe applied right on the child’s abdomen.That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

40

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

41

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

42

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across the

CAUTION: (Continued)


strongest part of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants always should besecured in appropriate infant restraints.

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

43

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

44

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

45

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured in thevehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,the child has to be secured within the childrestraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to be used ina vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.Then follow the instructions for the restraint.You may find these instructions on the restraintitself or in a booklet, or both.

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety beltor LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 50 for more information. A child canbe endangered in a crash if the child restraint isnot properly secured in the vehicle.

46

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both,and to this manual. The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child is not properly securedin the child restraint. Make sure the child isproperly secured, following theinstructions that came with that restraint.

47

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in arear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child riding ina booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.


48


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

49

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never be installed using onlythe top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

50

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

51

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position withlower anchors has twolabels, near the creasebetween the seatbackand the seat cushion.

Rear Seat

52

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located on thetrim cover.

The top tether anchors are located under the trimcovers on the rear seatback filler panel. Besure to use an anchor located on the same side ofthe vehicle as the seating position where thechild restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 48 for additional information.

53

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

54

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

55

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Open the top tether anchor trim cover

to expose the anchor.2.3. If you have an adjustable head restraint,

raise the head restraint.2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether underthe head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

56

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether underthe head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 50.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

57

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

58

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 50.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. Arear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facingchild restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 48.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 74 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 245 formore information on this including importantsafety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

59

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.



If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraintin the right front seat position, move the seat as farback as it will go before securing the forward-facingchild restraint. See Power Seats on page 9.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 50.

There is no top tether anchor in the right frontpassenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat inthis position if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 50 if your childrestraint has a top tether.

60

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 74. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat asfar back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See Power Seatson page 9.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passengerairbag status indicator should light and stay litwhen the vehicle is running. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 245.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

61

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.

62


8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in theoverhead console will be lit and stay litwhen the vehicle is running.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers heaters or massagers, located between theseat cushion and the child restraint or smalloccupant, can affect how the passenger sensingsystem operates. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat cushion before reinstalling/securingthe child restraint or small occupant.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

63

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has six airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver and anotherfrontal airbag for the right front passenger.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for thedriver and another for the right frontpassenger.

• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for thedriver and passenger directly behind the driver.

• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the rightfront passenger and the person seated directlybehind that passenger.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.

64

{CAUTION:

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate inrollover, rear crashes, or in many sidecrashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags androof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover or in rearcrashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

65

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults,but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system norits airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure children properlyin your vehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 38 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 40.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 244 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

66

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driveris in the side of the driver’s seatback closest tothe door.

67

The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the rightfront passenger is in the side of the passenger’sseatback closest to the door.

The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driverand the person seated directly behind the driveris in the ceiling above the side windows.

68

The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the rightfront passenger and the person seated directlybehind that passenger is in the ceiling above theside windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. Never secureanything to the roof of your vehicle byrouting the rope or tie-down through anydoor or window opening. If you do, thepath of an inflating airbag will be blocked.Do not let seat covers block the inflationpath of a side impact airbag. The path ofan inflating airbag must be kept clear.

69

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint according tocrash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts,these airbags inflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontal impacts, fulldeployment occurs. If the front of your vehicle goesstraight into a wall that does not move or deform,

the threshold level for the reduced deployment isabout 12 to 15 mph (19 to 24 km/h), and thethreshold level for a full deployment is about16 to 23 mph (26 to 37 km/h). The threshold levelcan vary, however, with specific vehicle design, sothat it can be somewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

70

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Side impact airbags are intended to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes. A side impactairbag will inflate if the crash severity is above thesystem’s designed “threshold level.” Thethreshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Side impact airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers,or rear impacts. A side impact airbag is intendedto deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply because ofthe damage to a vehicle or because of whatthe repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflationis determined by what the vehicle hits, theangle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicleslows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. Forside impact airbags, inflation is determined bythe location and severity of the impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules. Frontalairbag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and the instrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the side of the frontseatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles withroof-mounted side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side window.

71

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. Butthe frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impactairbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quicklythat some people may not even realize an airbaginflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbagsmay still be at least partially inflated minutes afterthe vehicle comes to rest. Some componentsof the airbag module — the steering wheel hub forthe driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s bag, the side of theseatback closest to the door for the seat-mountedside impact airbags, and the area along theceiling of your vehicle near the side windows forroof-mounted side impact airbags — may behot for a short time. The parts of the airbag thatcome into contact with you may be warm, but nottoo hot to touch. There may be some smokeand dust coming from the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driverfrom seeing out of the windshield or being ableto steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

72

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, andturn the hazard warning flashers on when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for those features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afteran airbag inflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 536.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag systems. Improper service can meanthat an airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.

73

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system forthe right front passenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visible when thevehicle is running.

The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible in the overhead consoleduring the system check. When the system checkis complete, either the word ON or the wordOFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off willbe visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 245.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.


United States Canada

74

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicatorin the overhead console will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 245.

75

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 59.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properlyin the right front passenger’s seat.

When the passenger sensing system has allowedthe airbag to be enabled, the on indicator willlight and stay lit to remind you that the airbagis active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor about two minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s airbag.

76

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that something maybe wrong with the airbag system.



If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 244 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters and seat massagerscan affect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. Remove any additional material fromthe seat cushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint or small occupant. You may wantto consider not using seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment if your vehicle has thepassenger sensing system. See Adding Equipmentto Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 79 formore information about modifications that canaffect how the system operates.

77

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 543.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

78

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 526.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, overhead console, ceilingheadliner, ceiling and pillar garnish trim,roof-mounted airbag modules, or airbag wiringcan affect the operation of the airbagsystem. If you have questions, call CustomerAssistance. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 526.

79

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts on page 479 for moreinformation.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, orthe airbag covering on the driver’s and rightfront passenger’s seatback, or the side impactairbag covering on the ceiling near the sidewindows, the bag may not work properly. Youmay have to replace the airbag module in thesteering wheel, both the airbag module and theinstrument panel for the right front passenger’sairbag, the airbag module and seatback for thedriver’s and right front passenger’sseat-mounted side impact airbags, or sideimpact airbag module and ceiling covering forthe roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do notopen or break the airbag coverings.

80

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect the personusing it, resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help make sure yourrestraint systems are working properly aftera crash, have them inspected and anynecessary replacements made as soon aspossible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new beltsor LATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need toreplace the driver’s and right front passenger’ssafety belt buckle assembly. Be sure to doso. Then the new buckle assembly will be there tohelp protect you in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt buckleassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt buckle assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 244.

81

✍ NOTES

82

Keys .............................................................. 85Keyless Access System .............................. 87Keyless Access System Operation .............. 88

Doors and Locks .......................................... 98Door Locks ................................................. 98Power Door Locks ....................................... 99Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 99Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 100Lockout Protection ..................................... 101Trunk ........................................................ 101

Windows ...................................................... 104Power Windows ........................................ 105Sun Visors ................................................ 107

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 107Theft-Deterrent System .............................. 108Valet Lockout Switch ................................. 110

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 111New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 111Ignition Positions ....................................... 111Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 112Starting the Engine .................................... 113

Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 115Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 116Parking Brake ........................................... 121Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 122Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 124Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 124Engine Exhaust ......................................... 125Running the Engine While Parked ............. 126

Mirrors ......................................................... 127Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with Intellibeam™ and OnStar® .............. 127Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror .......... 127Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® .......................................... 127Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® and Compass ................... 128Outside Power Heated Mirrors ................... 130Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ............. 131Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 131Outside Parallel Park Assist Mirror ............ 131

OnStar® System .......................................... 132

Section 2 Features and Controls

83

Universal Home Remote System ................ 135Universal Home Remote System

(With Three Round LED) ....................... 135Universal Home Remote System

(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 136Universal Home Remote System

Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 137Universal Home Remote System Operation

(With One Triangular LED) ...................... 142

Storage Areas ............................................. 146Glove Box ................................................. 146Cupholder(s) .............................................. 146Center Console Storage Area .................... 146Convenience Net ....................................... 146

Sunroof ....................................................... 147Vehicle Personalization .............................. 148

Memory Seat, Mirrors andSteering Wheel ...................................... 169

Section 2 Features and Controls

84

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with thekeyless access transmitter is dangerousfor many reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed. Theycould operate the power windows or othercontrols or even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeyless access transmitter in the vehicleand they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keyless accesstransmitter in a vehicle with children.

85

You will have either of the following keys below.

This key can be usedfor the driver’s door,glove box and rear seatpass-through door.See “Rear SeatPass-Through Door”under Trunk onpage 101 for moreinformation.

This key, located insidethe keyless accesstransmitter, can be usedfor the driver’s door,glove box, and rear seatpass-through door.See “Rear SeatPass-Through Door”under Trunk onpage 101 for moreinformation.

To remove the key,press the button (A)near the bottom of thekeyless accesstransmitter, and pull thekey out. Never pullthe key without pressingthe button.

Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System withpushbutton start. See Ignition Positions onpage 111 for information on starting the vehicle.

Notice: If you ever lose your transmitter(s)and/or key, it could be difficult to get into yourvehicle. You may even have to damage yourvehicle to get in. Be sure you have a sparetransmitter and/or key.

In an emergency, contact Cadillac RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Service on page 531.

86

Keyless Access SystemYour vehicle has a Keyless Access System thatoperates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

If you ever notice a decrease in the keylessaccess transmitter range, try doing one of thefollowing:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Keyless Access System Operation onpage 88.

• Check to make sure that an electronic devicesuch as a cellular phone or lap top computeris not causing interference.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

87

Keyless Access System OperationYour vehicle has a Keyless Access Systemthat lets you lock and unlock your vehicle’s doors,open the trunk lid, remotely start the engine,and locate your vehicle, or sound your vehicle’salarm from a distance as much as 30 feet(10 m) away.

The Keyless Access System also lets you lockand unlock the vehicle’s doors and accessthe trunk without removing the remote transmitterfrom your pocket, purse, briefcase, etc. Thesystem operates when the transmitter is locatedwithin 3 feet (1 m) of the door or trunk of yourvehicle. See “Keyless Doors Unlock” and “KeylessFt (Front) Door Unlock” under VehiclePersonalization on page 148.

You will have either of the following keylessaccess transmitters below.

Your vehicle comes with two transmitters.

Q (Lock): Press this button to lock the doors.The lock status light on the front doors will turn onfor five seconds and the turn signal indicatorswill flash. If this button is pressed twice, the doorswill lock, the status light on the door will turn onfor five seconds, the turn signal indicators will flashtwice, and the horn will sound once.

88

If the engine is off, the windows may be closedfrom outside the vehicle using the lock buttonon the keyless access transmitter. Press and holdthe lock button for more than two seconds toclose any open window(s) on your vehicle. If anywindow is unable to close completely, it willreverse and the horn will chirp. See “Anti-PinchFeature” under Power Windows on page 105for more information.

You can program your vehicle so the turn signalindicators will not flash and the horn will not soundwhen pressing the lock button on the keylessaccess transmitter. For more informationsee “Lights Flash at Lock” and “Horn Chirps atLock” under Vehicle Personalization on page 148.

/ (Remote Start): Press this button to operatethe remote start feature. See “Remote VehicleStart” at the end of this section for more detailedinformation.

" (Unlock): Press this button once to unlockthe driver’s door. The turn signal indicators willflash twice. Press the unlock button twice withinfive seconds to unlock all the doors. If it is darkenough outside, your interior lamps will come on.

You can program your vehicle so the turn signalindicators will not flash and the fog lamps andreverse lamps remain on steady for about20 seconds when the keyless access transmitter isused to unlock the vehicle. See “Lights Flash atLock” and “Ext. (Exterior) Lights at Unlock” underVehicle Personalization on page 148.

If your vehicle has the memory feature you canprogram and recall memory settings when youpress the unlock button on the keyless accesstransmitter. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheel on page 169 for more information.

G (Trunk): Press and hold this button forabout one second to open the trunk whilethe engine is turned off or the shift lever is inPARK (P).

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press andrelease this button to locate your vehicle. The hornwill chirp three times and the turn signal lampswill flash three times. Press and hold the button forthree seconds to sound the panic alarm. Thehorn will chirp and the turn signal lamps will flashfor 30 seconds. Press and release the buttonagain to cancel the panic alarm.

89

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach Keyless Access System is coded to allowonly transmitters programmed to your vehicleto work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased and programmedthrough your dealer. Your dealer can reprogramyour vehicle so lost or stolen transmitters no longerwork with your vehicle. Each vehicle can have amaximum of four transmitters matched to it.

To match a new transmitter to your vehicle whenyou have a recognized transmitter, do thefollowing. Two recognized transmitters are requiredfor Canadian owners.

1. The vehicle must be off.

2. Have the recognized transmitter and the new,unrecognized transmitter(s) with you.

3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lockcylinder located on the outside of thedriver’s door.

4. Turn the key to the unlock positionfive times within five seconds.

5. The Driver Information Center (DIC)will display READY FOR FOB X,where X can be 2, 3 or 4.

90

6. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter intothe transmitter pocket with the transmitterbuttons facing the front of the vehicle.The transmitter pocket is inside the centerconsole storage area located betweenthe driver and front passenger seats.

7. Once the transmitter is programmed,a beep will sound. The DIC will displayREADY FOR X, where X can be 3 or 4,or MAX # FOBS LEARNED.

8. Remove the transmitter from the transmitterpocket and press the unlock button on thekeyless access transmitter two times.

The Canadian immobilizer standard requiresCanadian owners to see their dealer for matchingnew transmitters when a recognized transmitteris not available. United States owners arepermitted to match a new transmitter to theirvehicle when a recognized transmitter isnot available.

91

The procedure will require three, ten minute cyclesto complete the matching process. Do the following:

1. The vehicle must be off.

2. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter intothe transmitter pocket with the transmitterbuttons facing the front of the vehicle.The transmitter pocket is inside the centerconsole storage area located betweenthe driver and front passenger seats.

3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lockcylinder located on the driver’s door.

92

4. Turn the key to the unlock position five timeswithin five seconds.

5. The DIC message will display OFF/ACC TOLEARN.

6. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch).

7. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and willcount down to zero, one minute at a time.

8. The DIC will display OFF/ACC TO LEARNagain.

9. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch) again.

10. The DIC will again read WAIT 10 MINUTESand will count down to zero, one minuteat a time.

11. The DIC will display OFF/ACC TOLEARN again.

12. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch) again.

13. The DIC will again read WAIT 10 MINUTESand will count down to zero, one minuteat a time.

14. A beep will sound and the DIC will readREADY FOR FOB 1. At this time, allpreviously known transmitters have beenerased.

15. Once the transmitter is recognized andprogrammed, a beep will sound and theDIC will display READY FOR FOB 2.

16. Remove the keyless access transmitter andpress the unlock button twice to initialize it.

If you have additional transmitters to program, thisprocess can be repeated until four transmittershave been programmed. The DIC will then displayMAX # FOBS LEARNED and will exit theprogramming mode.

When you are done programming transmitters,press the unlock button on each keyless accesstransmitter twice. After performing this process,transmitters previously programmed will no longerwork with your vehicle and must be reprogrammed.

93

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your keylessaccess transmitter should last about three years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will notwork at the normal range in any location. If youhave to get close to your vehicle before thetransmitter works, it is probably time to change thebattery. The DIC may display KEY FOBBATTERY LOW.

A weak battery may also cause the DIC to displayNO FOBS DETECTED when you try to startthe vehicle. If this happens, place the transmitterin the center console storage area transmitterpocket with the buttons facing to the front of thevehicle. Then, with the vehicle in PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N), press the brake pedal and thestart button. See Starting the Engine on page 113,for additional information about your vehicle’selectronic keyless ignition with push button start.Although this will start the vehicle, it isrecommended that you replace the transmitterbattery as soon as possible.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

94

To replace the battery, do the following:

1. Depending on which keyless accesstransmitter you have, Insert a flat object with athin edge into the slot on the side or backof the transmitter and separate the bottom halffrom the top half.

2. Carefully pull the battery out of the transmitter.

3. Put the new battery in the transmitter,positive (+) side down. Use a batterytype CR2032 or equivalent.

4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to putit together so water will not get inside thetransmitter.

5. Test the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartThis feature allows you to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle.

Before the remote vehicle start system can beoperated with the keyless access transmitterit must be activated. The remote start system isturned on through the vehicle personalizationsystem.

You can also program the remote vehicle startsystem to start up the vehicle’s automatic climatecontrol system. If this feature is turned on, thesystem monitors the outside temperature and turnson the rear window defogger, front windowdefogger, and heated or ventilated seats, if yourvehicle has them. See “Personal SettingsMenu” under Vehicle Personalization on page 148.

95

/ (Remote Start): To start the vehicle using theremote start feature, do the following:

1. Aim the remote keyless access transmitter atthe vehicle.

2. Press the transmitter’s lock button, release it,and then immediately press and hold thetransmitter’s remote start button for at leastthree seconds or until the vehicle’s turn signallamps flash. The vehicle’s doors will belocked.When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps willturn on and remain on while the vehicle isrunning.

3. If it is the first remote start since the vehiclehas been driven, repeat these steps, whilethe engine is still running, to extend the enginerunning time by 10 minutes. Remote startcan be extended one time.

If the vehicle is left running it will automaticallyshut off after 10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done. To manually shut off a remotestart, do any of the following:

• Aim the keyless access transmitter at thevehicle and press the remote start button untilthe parking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Press the Acc. button (ignition switch). SeeIgnition Positions on page 111.

• Turn on the valet lockout switch. See ValetLockout Switch on page 110.

When you enter the vehicle during a remote start,press the brake pedal and press the startbutton on the keyless ignition switch to transitionfrom remote start operation to normal vehicleoperation.

Laws in some local communities may restrict theuse of remote starters. For example, laws mayrequire a person using remote start to havethe vehicle in view when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

96

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

The remote start feature provides two separatestarts, each with 10 minutes of engine running. Ifyou press the lock button and then hold theremote start button on the keyless accesstransmitter again for at least three seconds beforethe first 10 minutes of engine running time hasexpired, 10 minutes is added to the remainingminutes. For example, if the remote start isinitiated again after five minutes of the engine runtime, 10 minutes is added and you now have15 minutes with the engine running. Oncetwo remote starts or 20 minutes of the enginerunning have been provided, the vehicle must bestarted using the keyless access with pushbuttonstart feature, if the engine needs to be restarted.See Starting the Engine on page 113 for moreinformation regarding the keyless ignition.

The remote start feature will not operate if any ofthe following occur:

• The check engine light is displayed. See“Check Engine Light” under MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 252.

• The valet lockout switch is on.

• The keyless access transmitter is in thevehicle.

• The vehicle’s hood is open.

• The vehicle personalization feature is notenabled.

• An unauthorized vehicle entry or a vehicletheft was attempted.

Your keyless access transmitter, with the remotestart button, provides an increased range ofoperation. However, the range may be less whilethe vehicle is running. As a result, you mayneed to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off thanyou were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see KeylessAccess System on page 87.

97

Doors and LocksDoor Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out ofa moving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crashif the doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.



• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlockyour vehicle.

From the outside, press the lock or unlock buttonon the keyless access transmitter. When youhave your transmitter with you, you mayalso unlock and open the door by pulling the doorhandle. You do not have to press the unlockbutton on the transmitter. Entry occurs when thedoor handle is pulled and the vehicle recognizesyour transmitter. See Vehicle Personalizationon page 148 for information on how to programthe keyless access feature.

98

From the inside, use the power door lock switcheslocated on each front door. See Power DoorLocks on page 99 for more information. The rearpassenger doors have manual door lock knobslocated at the top of the door panel near thewindow. Push down the knob to lock the door.Pull up the knob to unlock the door.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches are located on thearmrest on the front doors.

K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch with theunlock symbol to unlock the doors.

Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with thelock symbol to lock the doors.

Programmable Automatic DoorLocksYour vehicle was programmed from the factory sothat when the doors are closed, the ignition ison and the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P),all the doors will lock.

The front doors can still be opened from the insidewhile the doors are locked. If a rear passengerneeds to exit the vehicle, have that person use themanual knob or use the power door lock switch oneither front door. When the door is closed again, itwill not lock automatically. Use the manual knob orthe power door lock switch to lock the door.

The doors were also programmed from the factoryto unlock every time the shift lever is movedback into PARK (P).

The power door locks can be programmedthrough the radio display. The radio display allowsyou to choose various lock and unlock settings.For more information on programming, see VehiclePersonalization on page 148.

99

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks thatprevent passengers from opening the rear doorson your vehicle from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door. Youmust open the reardoors to access them.

To use these locks, do the following:

1. Insert your key into the slot next to the reardoor security lock label and turn it to engagethe lock.

2. Close the door.3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.

The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be openedfrom the inside when this feature is in use.

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, the front door powerlock switch or by lifting the rear doormanual lock.

2. Then open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert your key into the slot next to therear door security lock label and turn itto disengage the lock.

3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.

The rear door locks will now work normally.

100

Lockout ProtectionYour vehicle can be programmed to sound thehorn three times and unlock the driver’s door whenall doors are closed and there is a keylessaccess transmitter inside the interior of the vehicle.When the driver’s door is reopened, the key inreminder chime will sound continuously. Thevehicle will remain locked only when at least onetransmitter has been removed from the vehicleand both doors are closed. See VehiclePersonalization on page 148.

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with thetrunk lid open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open themall the way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 125.

101

Trunk Lid ReleaseThere are several ways to release the trunk lid.

• V (Trunk Lid Release): Press thisbutton located on the driver’s door. The vehiclemust be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) andthe valet mode turned off. To disablevalet mode, see Valet Lockout Switch onpage 110.

• Press the trunk lid release button on thekeyless access transmitter. See KeylessAccess System Operation on page 88. Thevehicle must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)and the valet mode turned off. • Squeeze the trunk release button located on

the rear of the trunk lid above the licenseplate, as long as you have your keylessaccess transmitter with you. Entry occurs whenthe button is being pressed and the vehiclerecognizes the transmitter. The vehiclemust be in PARK (P) and the valet modeturned off.

If your vehicle has lost battery power, you can stillaccess the trunk by unlocking and lowering therear seat pass-through door and pulling theemergency trunk release handle.

102

Rear Seat Pass-Through DoorThis feature allows you to access the trunk withoutopening the trunk lid. If the vehicle ever losespower, the trunk can be accessed and openedthrough this door.

To open the door, do the following:

1. Pull the rear seat armrest down.

2. If the door is locked, insert the key into thelock and turn it counterclockwise.

3. Press the button above the lock.

4. Lower the door.

To open the trunk lid, pull the emergency trunkrelease handle located in the trunk on theother side of the door opening. See “EmergencyTrunk Release Handle” following.

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle.

There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handlelocated inside the trunk near the back of therear seats. This handle will glow followingexposure to light. Pull down the release handle toopen the trunk from the inside of the vehicle.

103

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

104

Power Windows

The power window switches are located on thearmrest near each window. Press the front of theswitch to the first position to open the windowto the desired level. Lift up the front of the switchto the first position to close the window.

Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power(RAP) that allows you to use the power windowsonce the engine has been turned off. For moreinformation, see Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 112.

Express-Down WindowThis feature is on all windows. It allows you tolower the window all the way without holding theswitch down.

Press the front of the switch to the secondposition and release. If you want to stop thewindow as it is lowering, briefly pull up the switch.

Express-Up WindowThis feature is on all windows. It allows you toraise the window all the way without holding theswitch up. Lift the front of the switch briefly toactivate the express-up feature. If you want to stopthe window as it is raising, briefly press theswitch.

105

Programming the Power WindowsIf the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,disconnected, or is not working, you will need toreprogram each window for the express-up featureto work.

To program each window, follow these steps:

1. With the ignition on or in Acc., or while RAP isactive, close all doors.

2. Press and hold the power window switch untilthe window has fully opened.

3. Continue holding the switch for approximatelytwo seconds.

4. Pull up the power window switch until thewindow is fully closed.

The window is now programmed. Repeat theprocess for all windows.

Express Window Anti-Pinch FeatureIf any object is in the path of the window when theexpress-up is active, the window will stop at theobstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factoryposition. Weather conditions such as severe icingmay also cause the window to auto-reverse.The window will return to normal operation once theobstruction or condition is removed.

Express Window Anti-Pinch Override

{CAUTION:

If express override is activated, thewindow will not reverse automatically.You or others could be injured and thewindow could be damaged. Before youuse express override, make sure that allpeople and obstructions are clear of thewindow path.

In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can beoverridden in a supervised mode. Hold the windowswitch all the way up in the express position.The window will rise for as long as the switch isheld. Once the switch is released, the expressmode is re-activated.

In this mode, the window can still close on an objectin its path. Use care when using the override mode.

106

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockoutbutton is located on the driver’s door armrestnear the window switches. Press this button todisable the rear window controls. The light on thebutton will illuminate, indicating that the featureis in use. The rear windows can be raised orlowered using the driver’s window switches whenthe lockout feature is on. To restore power tothe rear windows, press the button again. The lighton the button will go out.

The front passenger window can be programmedto be disabled using the window lockout button.See Vehicle Personalization on page 148.

Secure Car FeatureThe windows can be closed by pressing the lockbutton on the keyless access transmitter. SeeKeyless Access System Operation on page 88 formore information. The window, if down, willexpress-up. If any window was unable tocompletely close, it will reverse and the horn willchirp. See “Anti-Pinch Feature” previously.The engine must be off to operate this feature.

Sun VisorsSwing down the visor or detach it from the centermount and move to the side to block out glare.The visors also have side-to-side slide capabilityfor greater coverage.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorsPull the visor down and lift the cover. Move theslide switch up or down to brighten or dimthe lamp.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothingwe put on it can make it impossible to steal.

107

Theft-Deterrent SystemYour vehicle has a theft-deterrent alarm system.

The security light islocated on theinstrument panel cluster.

If the ignition is off and a door is open, thesecurity light will flash, reminding you to armthe theft-deterrent system.

To arm the system, do one of the following:

• Press the lock button on the keyless accesstransmitter. If the door is closed when thelock button is pressed, the security lightwill stay illuminated for 30 seconds. After thesecurity light goes off, the theft-deterrentsystem is armed. Pressing the lock buttontwice will arm the system immediately.If the vehicle is locked using the keylessaccess transmitter and the trunk lid, hoodor a door is open or not closed completely,

the security light will flash for 60 seconds andthen turn off. At this time, the theft-deterrentsystem is armed but the alarm will not sound ifthe trunk lid, hood or door that was notclosed completely is tampered with or opened.The alarm will sound for the trunk lid, hoodor a door that was completely closed atthe time the vehicle was locked using thekeyless access transmitter.

• Open the door. Lock the door with the powerdoor lock switch or lock button on the keylessaccess transmitter. The security light shouldflash. Close the door. The security lightwill stop flashing and stay on. After 30 secondsthe light should turn off, the theft-deterrentsystem is armed.

• Passive Arming, if activated through thevehicle personalization feature, will armthe system automatically after you close thedoor and take at least one keyless accesstransmitter with you. The security light will turnon. After 60 seconds the light should turnoff. The theft-deterrent system is armed. SeeVehicle Personalization on page 148.

108

If a door, hood, or the trunk is opened withoutthe keyless access transmitter, the horn willsound for 30 seconds and the lamps will flashfor two minutes. The vehicle cannot be startedwithout a keyless access transmitter.The Theft-Deterrent system will not arm if:• The key is used to turn the key cylinder to

the lock position.• The driver’s door is locked using the power

door lock switch after the doors are closed.If the vehicle is locked using the keyless accesstransmitter and the trunk lid, hood or a dooris open or not closed completely, the securitylight will flash for 60 seconds and then turn off.At this time, the theft-deterrent system is armedbut the alarm will not sound if the trunk lid, hood ordoor that was not closed completely is tamperedwith or opened. The alarm will sound for thetrunk lid, hood or a door that was completelyclosed at the time the vehicle was locked usingthe keyless access transmitter.The vehicle can be programmed to automaticallyunlock the doors and disarm the theft-deterrentsystem when you approach the vehicle andthe keyless access transmitter is with you. SeeVehicle Personalization on page 148.

Pressing the unlock button on the keyless accesstransmitter or using the key to unlock thedriver’s door disarms the theft-deterrent system.Unlocking a door any other way while thesystem is armed will activate the alarm.

Testing the Alarm1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window,

then get out of the vehicle, keeping thedoor open.

2. From outside of the vehicle, with the dooropen, lock the vehicle using the power doorlock switch or the keyless access transmitterand close the door. Wait about 30 secondsuntil the security light goes off.

3. Reach in and open the door using the insidedoor handle. The horn will sound and theexterior lamps will flash.

You can turn off the alarm by pressing the unlockbutton on the keyless access transmitter or bystarting the car.

If the alarm does not sound when it should, check tosee if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.

109

To replace the fuse, see Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 487. If the fuse does not need tobe replaced, you may need to have your vehicleserviced.

To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm theTheft-Deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.

Valet Lockout Switch

The valet lockout switchis located inside theglove box.

9 (Off): Press the left side of the valet lockoutswitch to turn the lockout feature off. When thelockout feature is off, you can open the trunk usingeither the keyless access transmitter or the trunkrelease button located on the driver’s door.

R (On): Press the right side of the valet lockoutswitch to turn the lockout feature on. Whenthe lockout feature is turned on, the trunk cannotbe unlocked with the keyless access transmitteror the trunk release button located on the driver’sdoor. If the valet lockout feature is on it willalso disable the remote start feature and theUniversal Home Remote transmitter, if equipped.

Locking the glove box with your key will alsohelp to secure your vehicle.

See Keyless Access System Operation onpage 88 and Trunk on page 101 for additionalinformation.

110

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops with new linings canmean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 357 for thetrailer towing capabilities of your vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

Ignition Positions

Your vehicle has anelectronic keylessignition withpushbutton start.

/ (START): Press this button while your foot ison the brake to start the engine. The shiftermust be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to start theengine and the keyless access transmitter mustbe in the vehicle for the ignition to work.

111

9/Acc. (OFF/ACCESSORY): When this buttonis pressed, the engine will turn off even if the shifteris not in PARK (P). If the shifter is in PARK (P), theignition mode will change to RAP, if all doors areclosed. The ignition mode will change to off, if afront door is opened. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 112 for more information.If the shifter is not in PARK (P), the ignition modewill change to Acc. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 122.

When the engine is off, press this button to placethe vehicle in accessory mode. ACCESSORYACTIVE will display on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). This mode allows you to use thingslike the radio and the windshield wipers while theengine is off. Use accessory mode if you must haveyour vehicle in motion while the engine is off, forexample, if your vehicle is being towed. If the dooris open while in accessory mode, the key inreminder chime will sound continuously.

If the push-button start is not working, your vehiclemay be near a strong radio antenna signal causinginterference to the keyless access system. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 264 for moreinformation.

After being in Acc. for about 20 minutes, the vehiclewill automatically enter RAP or will turn off,depending on if the doors are opened or closed.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)The following accessories on your vehicle may beused for up to 20 minutes after the engine isturned off:

• Radio

• Power Windows

• Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Power to these accessories stops after 20 minutesor if one of the front doors is opened. If youwant power for another 20 minutes, close all thedoors and press to Acc. to place the vehiclein accessory mode. Press the button again andthe vehicle will return to RAP.

112

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N).

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only when your vehicle is stopped.

The keyless access transmitter must be inside thevehicle for the ignition to work.

Cell phone chargers can interfere with theoperation of the Keyless Access System. Batterychargers should not be plugged in when startingor turning off the engine.

To start you vehicle, do the following:

1. With your foot on the brake pedal, press theSTART button located on the instrument panel.If there is not a keyless access transmitter inthe vehicle or if there is something causinginterference with it, the DIC will displayNO FOBS DETECTED. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 264 for moreinformation.

2. When the engine begins cranking, let go ofthe button and the engine cranks automaticallyuntil it starts. If the battery in the keylessaccess transmitter is weak, the DIC displaysKEY FOB BATTERY LOW. You can stilldrive the vehicle.See “Battery Replacement” under KeylessAccess System Operation on page 88for more information. If the fob battery isdead, you need to insert the fob into the fobslot to enable engine starting. See “NoFobs Detected” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 264.

3. Do not race the engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engine and transmissiongently until the oil warms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

4. If the engine does not start and no DICmessage is displayed, wait 15 secondsbefore trying again to let the cranking motorcool down.

113

If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor while cranking for up to15 seconds maximum. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stops again, do the samething. This clears the extra gasoline fromthe engine.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by pressing the START buttonimmediately after cranking has ended, canoverheat and damage the cranking motor, anddrain the battery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow the cranking motorto cool down.

Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists in starting theengine and protects components. Once crankinghas been initiated, the engine continues crankingfor a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.

If the engine does not start, cranking automaticallystops after 15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking if the engineis already running.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, your engine might notperform properly. Any resulting damage wouldnot be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

Stopping Your EngineMove the shift lever to PARK (P) and press the Acc.button located on the instrument panel. If the shifteris not in PARK (P), the engine shuts off and thevehicle goes into the Accessory Mode. The DICdisplays “SHIFT TO PARK”. Once the shifter ismoved to PARK (P), the vehicle turns off.If the keyless access transmitter is not detectedinside the vehicle when it is turned to off, the DICdisplays NO FOB OFF OR RUN?.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 264 formore information.

114

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may be equipped with an enginecoolant heater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, theengine coolant heater can help. You will get easierstarting and better fuel economy during enginewarm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.For the 3.6L V6 engine, the cord is located inthe engine compartment on the passenger’sside of the vehicle in front of the fuse block.For the 4.6L V8 engine, the cord is located inthe engine compartment on the driver’sside of the vehicle near the inner fender andabove the strut.For the 4.4L V8 engine, the cord is located inthe front of the engine compartment, onthe passenger’s side of the vehicle. The plugwill be inside the upper grille cutout.

3. You must remove the plastic cap to accessthe plug.

115

4. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-voltAC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

5. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to list

everything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

Automatic Transmission OperationThe shift lever is located on the center consolebetween the front seats.

There are severaldifferent positions forthe shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels.It is the best position to use when you startthe engine because your vehicle cannot moveeasily.

116

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 122. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 357.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transmission shift lock control system.

You must fully apply your regular brakes first andthen press the shift lever button before youcan shift from PARK (P) when the vehicle isrunning. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), easepressure on the shift lever and push the shiftlever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever into another gear. SeeShifting Out of Park (P) on page 124.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transmission. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

At low vehicle speeds, you can also useREVERSE (R) to rock your vehicle back and forthto get out of snow, ice, or sand without damagingyour transmission. See If Your Vehicle is Stuckin Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 348 foradditional information.

117

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.You can also use NEUTRAL (N) when yourvehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at highspeed may damage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not running at highspeed when shifting your vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Itprovides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. Ifyou need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), pushthe accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.The transmission will shift down to a lowergear and have more power.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 332.

118

Driver Shift Control (DSC)Notice: If you drive your vehicle at highRPMs without upshifting while using DriverShift Control (DSC), you could damage yourvehicle. Always upshift when necessary whileusing DSC.Your automatic transmission has a Driver ShiftControl (DSC) feature that allows you to changegears similar to a manual transmission. To usethe DSC feature:1. Slide the shift lever over from DRIVE (D)

to the right into the DSC area.

When the transmission is in DSC mode thesport symbol in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) will come on.

If you do not move the shift lever forward orrearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode.When you are in the sport mode the vehiclewill still shift automatically. While drivingin sport mode, the transmission may remain ina gear longer than it would in normal drivingmode based on braking, throttle input,and vehicle lateral acceleration.

2. Press the shift lever forward to upshift orrearward to downshift.

The DIC will show thedriver’s selection whenmoving the shiftlever forward orrearward. See DriverInformation Center (DIC)on page 258 for moreinformation on the DIC.

119

If your vehicle has the V6 engine and 5-speedtransmission, when shifting manually, the numberdisplayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)indicates the highest gear allowed (1,2,3,4,5).If First (1) or Second (2) gear is selected, thetransmission will stay in that gear. If a highergear position is selected, the transmission willautomatically shift between the Second (2) gearposition up to the selected gear.

If your vehicle has the V8 engine and 6-speedtransmission, when shifting manually, the numberdisplayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)indicates the gear that the transmission is in.When starting the vehicle from a stopped condition,only First (1) and Second (2) gear may be used.

While using the DSC feature the vehicle willhave firmer shifting and increased performance.You can use this for sport driving or whenclimbing/descending hills to stay in gear longer orto down shift for more power or engine braking.

The transmission will only allow you to shift intogears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engineRevolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmissionwill not automatically shift to the next highergear if the engine RPM is too high.

If shifting is prevented for any reason, the selectedgear will flash multiple times, indicating that thetransmission has not shifted gears.

The transmission will allow you to shift to the gearselected and will automatically downshift whenthe vehicle comes to a stop. This will allowfor more power during take-off and passing.

120

Parking Brake

The parking brakepedal is located on thelower portion of theinstrument panel tothe left of the steeringwheel.

This vehicle has a push-to-release parking brakepedal. To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down with your right foot andpush the parking brake pedal down with yourleft foot.

If the ignition is on, the brake system warning lighton the instrument panel cluster should comeon. If it does not, you need to have your vehicleserviced. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 248 for more information.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown with your right foot and push the parkingbrake pedal with your left foot. When you lift yourleft foot, the parking brake releases.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

A warning chime will sound if the parking brakeis set, the ignition is on and the vehicle beginsto move. To stop the chime, fully release theparking brake.

If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 357 for moreinformation.

121

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 357.

To shift into PARK (P), use the following steps:

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) bypressing the button on the front of theshift lever while pushing the lever all the waytoward the front of the vehicle. Releasethe button.

3. With your right foot still holding the brakepedal down, set the parking brake withyour left foot. See Parking Brake on page 121for more information.

4. Turn the ignition off.

122

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.

Then, see if you can move the shift lever awayfrom PARK (P) without first pushing the button onthe shift lever. If you can, it means that theshift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transmission into PARK (P) properly,the weight of the vehicle may put too much forceon the parking pawl in the transmission. Youmay find it difficult to pull the shift lever outof PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” Toprevent torque lock, set the parking brake and thenshift into PARK (P) properly before you leavethe driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P).

123

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shiftlock control system. You have to fully applyyour regular brake before you can shift fromPARK (P) when the vehicle is running. SeeAutomatic Transmission Operation on page 116.If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever – push the shift lever all theway into PARK (P) and release the shift leverbutton as you maintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button and move theshift lever into the gear desired.

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but stillcannot shift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Press the regular bake.

2. Press the Acc. button twice to place theignition in accessory mode.

3. Apply and hold the brake until the end ofStep 4.

4. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).

5. Start the engine and then shift to the drivegear you want.

6. Have your vehicle inspected by your dealeras soon as possible.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

124

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when

driving over high points on the roador over road debris.



• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system

has been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

125

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 125.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 344.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake after youmove the shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 122.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 357.

126

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith Intellibeam™ and OnStar®

Your vehicle may have an Intellibeam™ insiderearview mirror with OnStar® controls. Formore information about OnStar®, see OnStar®

System on page 132.

To turn on and enable Intellibeam™, press andrelease the Intellibeam™ button on the inside rearview mirror. If the vehicle has the IntelliBeam™Intelligent High-Beam Headlamp Control System,the on/off button can also be used to turn offor reset this system. See “IntelliBeam™ IntelligentHigh-Beam Headlamp Control System” underHeadlamps on page 211.

Automatic Dimming Rearview MirrorYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror.

O (On/Off): Press and hold the button, locatedon the lower left side of the mirror face, forabout three seconds to turn the automatic dimmingfeature on or off. The indicator light will illuminatewhen this feature is active. The automaticdimming feature is active each time the vehicle isstarted.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar®

Your vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror that also contains OnStar®

controls. For more information on OnStar®, seeOnStar® System on page 132.

127

Mirror Operation

O (On/Off): Press and hold the button, locatedon the lower left side of the mirror face, for aboutthree seconds to turn the automatic dimmingfeature on or off. The indicator light will illuminatewhen this feature is active. The automatic dimmingfeature is active each time the vehicle is started.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with a compass display. The mirroralso contains OnStar® controls. For moreinformation see OnStar® System on page 132.The mirror includes an eight-point compass displayin the upper right corner of the mirror face.When on, the compass automatically calibrates asthe vehicle is driven.

Mirror Operation

O (On/Off): Press and hold the button, locatedon the lower left side of the mirror face, for aboutthree seconds to turn the automatic dimmingfeature on or off. The indicator light will illuminatewhen this feature is active. The automatic dimmingfeature is active each time the vehicle is started.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxesfor about two seconds. After two seconds,the mirror will display the compass heading.

Compass CalibrationIf after two seconds, the display does not show acompass heading (for example, N for North),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, magneticnote pad holder or a similar magnetic item. Ifthe letter C should ever appear in the compasswindow, the compass may need calibration.

128

The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehiclein circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

The compass can be placed in calibration modemanually by pressing and holding the on/off buttonuntil a C is shown in the compass display.

Compass VarianceThe zone is set to zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if you liveoutside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,as during a long distance cross-country trip, itwill be necessary to adjust for compass variance.Compass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If not adjusted to account for compass variance,your compass could give false readings.

To adjust for compass variance do the following:

1. Find the current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zonenumber appears in the display.

3. Once the zone number appears in the display,press the on/off button quickly until the correctzone number appears in the display. Stoppressing the button and the mirror will returnto normal operation. If C appears in thecompass window, the compass may needcalibration. See Compass Calibrationlisted previously.

129

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

Outside Power Heated Mirrors

The power mirrorcontrol is on the driver’sdoor armrest andcontrols the driver’sside and passenger’sside mirrors.

Move the selector switch left or right to choose thedriver’s side or passenger’s side mirror. Use thearrows located on the control pad to adjust

the position of each mirror. Adjust each mirror soyou can see the side of your vehicle and thearea behind your vehicle. Return the selectorswitch to the center position when finishedadjusting. This will prevent unwanted mirrormovement in case the control pad is accidentallybumped while driving.

The preferred mirror positions can be stored withthe memory option. See Memory Seat, Mirrorsand Steering Wheel on page 169.

The mirrors can be manually folded inward toprevent damage when going through car washesor confined spaces. To fold, push the mirrortoward the vehicle. To return the mirror to itsoriginal position, push outward. Be sure to returnboth mirrors to their original unfolded positionbefore driving.

When the rear window defogger is turned on, bothoutside rear view mirrors are heated to helpclear them of ice, snow, or condensation. See“Rear Window Defogger” under Dual ClimateControl System on page 230.

130

Outside Automatic Dimming MirrorThe driver’s side mirror will adjust for the glareof headlamps behind you. This feature is controlledby the on and off settings on the automaticdimming rearview mirror.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat. This mirror does nothave a dimming feature.

Outside Parallel Park Assist MirrorThis feature assists the driver by improvingrear obstacle detection and is useful in viewing thecurb when parallel parking.

Press the left or right mirror symbol on theselector control to choose the driver or passengeroutside mirror. When the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R), the selected mirror will tilt toa factory programmed position. If further mirroradjustment is needed press the arrows located onthe outside mirror control pad. If the outsidemirror selector switch is in the middle position,neither outside mirror will move.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R),and a five-second delay has occurred, themirror will return to its original position. The delayprevents movement of the mirror if multiplegear transitions REVERSE (R) to DRIVE (D) toREVERSE (R) occur during a parallel parkingmaneuver.

131

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You maycancel your OnStar® service at any time bycontacting OnStar® as provided below. A completeOnStar® Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms

and Conditions are included in the vehicle’sOnStar® Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca,contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, orpress the OnStar® button to speak with anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.For more information, press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

132

Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

Available Services included with Directions& Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be used withOnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-FreeCalling may also be linked to a Verizon Wirelessservice plan in the U.S. or a Bell Mobility serviceplan in Canada, depending on eligibility. To find outmore, refer to the OnStar® Owners Guide in thevehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar® advisorby pressing the OnStar® button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See the OnStar®

Owners Guide for more information (Only availablein the continental U.S.).

133

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 310 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS location

and, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

134

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®

equipment is active.

Universal Home RemoteSystem

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTV06A.

135

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:



The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTV06A.


Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2SAHL3.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:



The Canadian Registration ID number is2791021849A.


136

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light EmittingDiode (LED) under the Universal Home RemoteSystem buttons, follow the instructions below. Ifthere is one triangular LED next to the UniversalHome Remote System buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with one triangular LED).

This system provides a way to replace up to threeremote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

Do not use this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as,for future programming. You only need theoriginal remote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended that uponthe sale or lease termination of the vehicle,

137

the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing your UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

If you do not know if your garage door opener is afixed code or rolling code device, open yourgarage door opener’s remote control battery cover.Your garage door opener is a fixed code deviceif there is a panel of switches. If not, yourgarage door opener is a rolling code device.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.

138

Follow these steps to program up to threechannels:1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-held

transmitter.

2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.

3. Enter these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons at the sametime to put the device into programming mode.

4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In orderfrom left to right, and within two andone-half minutes, enter each switch settinginto the Universal Home Remote System.Push one button for each switch as follows:• Left button = “on” switch position.• Right button = “off” switch position.• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

Example of Switch Settings

139

5. After entering the switch settings, press andrelease all three buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1–8, choosing adifferent function button in Step 6 than what youused for the garage door opener.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.

Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.

140

Follow these steps to program up to threechannels:

1. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.

After pressing the “learn” button, you have10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4depending on your garage control unit. If youcannot locate the “learn” button, refer tothe owners guide for your garage door opener.

3. Press and hold the button you would liketo use to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light, abovethe selected button, should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to20 seconds.

4. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1–5, choosing adifferent function button in Step 3 than what youused for the garage door opener.

141

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell or terminate your lease.

To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for approximately 20 seconds,until the indicator lights, located directlyabove the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbuttons will be erased.

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) next to the Universal HomeRemote buttons, follow the instructions below.If your vehicle has three round LED underthe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With three round LED).

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.If you have a newer garage door opener with rollingcodes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8to complete the programming of your UniversalHome Remote Transmitter.

142

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. See“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later inthis section or, for assistance, see CustomerAssistance Offices on page 529.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate operator you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installedin your hand-held transmitter for quicker andmore accurate transmission of the radio-frequencysignal.

Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up to threechannels:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

143

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Donot repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constantlight, continue with Steps 6 through 8 followingto complete the programming of a rolling-codedevice, most commonly, a garage dooropener.

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release it.Immediately press and hold the same buttona second time for two seconds, thenrelease it. Immediately, press and hold thesame button a third time for two seconds, thenrelease.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” You donot want to repeat Step 1, as this will eraseall previous programming from the Universal HomeRemote buttons.

144

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they canbe reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

145

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed withStep 2 under “Programming Universal HomeRemote” shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 529.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever.The glove box has a light inside.

Cupholder(s)Your vehicle has two cupholders in the centerconsole area.

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle has a center console storage arealocated between the front seats. It includes storageareas, and accessory power outlet(s) on therear of the console.

Convenience NetYour vehicle may have a tie down strap andconvenience net. The convenience net attaches tothe floor or back wall of the rear of the vehicleusing six anchor points. The net can be used likea hammock across the rear of the vehicle orhooked on the floor. Put small loads, like grocerybags, behind the net. It can help keep themfrom falling over during sharp turns or quick startsand stops.

The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store themin the rear of the vehicle as far forward as you can.

146

Sunroof

If your vehicle has apower sunroof, theswitches are located onthe overhead console.

To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must beon or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) mustbe active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 112.

Express Open: The express open feature willoperate from the closed or partially open position.To express open the power sunroof, fully pressthe driver’s side switch rearward once. To stop thesunroof glass in a desired position other than tothe express-open position, press the switch again,

in either direction, to stop the movement. If thesunshade is in the closed position, it will open withthe sunroof, or it can be opened manually.

Vent Open: To open the power sunroof to thevent position from the closed position, press andhold the passenger’s side sunroof switch forward.The rear of the sunroof panel will tilt upward tothe full vent position. The sunshade must beopened manually.

Express Close: The express close feature willoperate from the open or partially open position.To express close the power sunroof, fully press thedriver’s side switch forward once. To stop thesunroof glass in a desired position otherthan closed, press the switch again in eitherdirection. The sunshade must be closed manually.

Close: To close the power sunroof, operate thecontrols according to one of the following:

• From the open position, press and hold thedriver’s side sunroof switch forward. Thesunshade must be closed manually.

• From the vent position, press and hold thepassenger’s side sunroof switch rearward.

147

Anti-Pinch: If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch featurewill detect the object and stop the sunrooffrom closing at the point of the obstruction. Thesunroof will then return to the full-open orvent position. To close the sunroof once it hasre-opened, refer to the two options previouslydescribed under the “Close” feature instructions.

Vehicle PersonalizationYour vehicle has personalization that allows you toprogram certain features to a preferred settingfor up to two drivers. The back of the keylessaccess transmitters are labelled 1 or 2. Additionalkeyless access transmitters programmed tothe vehicle, as 3 and/or 4, do not have a numberon the back and are not capable of beingpersonalized. The number of programmablefeatures varies depending upon which vehicleoptions are purchased.

On all vehicles, features such as climate controlsettings, radio and XM™ preset settings, exteriorlighting at unlock and remote lock unlockconfirmation, and language have already beenprogrammed for your convenience. Your vehiclealso has an automatic door locking feature

that is always on. You cannot turn the automaticdoor locking feature off. See ProgrammableAutomatic Door Locks on page 99.

Some vehicles have additional features that canbe programmed including the seat, steeringcolumn, and outside rearview mirror position.

If your vehicle has the base audio system,the following information explains the vehiclepersonalization on your vehicle.

If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see“Personalization” in the Index of the NavigationSystem manual for information on vehiclepersonalization.

If your vehicle has the ability to program additionalpersonalization features, the driver’s preferencesare recalled by pressing any button on the keylessaccess transmitter, 1 or 2, by selectingDriver 1 or 2 on the radio display, or when a validkeyless access transmitter is detected uponopening the driver’s door.

If more than one valid keyless access transmitteris detected upon opening the driver’s door, thedriver preferences for the lowest driver number willbe recalled.

148

Certain features can be programmed not to recalluntil the ignition is turned off.

To change feature preferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the Personal Settings MenuTo enter the feature programming mode, usethe following procedure:

1. Be sure the ignition is either on, in Acc., or inRAP and place the transmission in PARK (P)or make sure that the vehicle speed isless than 6 mph (9 km/h).To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press any button on the appropriate keylessaccess transmitter to identify yourself asDriver 1 or Driver 2.

3. Turn on the radio by pressing thepower/volume knob.

4. Press the CNFG radio button or thetune/select knob located on the right side ofthe radio to enter the radio’s main menu.

5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll toSETUP.

6. Press the tune/select knob to enter theSETUP menu.

7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll toPERSONAL SETTINGS MENU, thenpress the tune/select knob to turn the featureon. A check mark appears after thisselection when it is turned on and the entirelist of personalization features will appear.

8. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to thefeature you want to change, then press thetune/select knob to turn the feature on or off. Ifthe feature is turned on, a check mark willappear next to the feature name.Some features have submenus that showadditional features that can be turned on or off.After entering a submenu, turn the tune/selectknob and scroll to the feature you want tochange, then press the tune/select knobto turn the feature on or off.

149

Personal Settings Menu ItemsThe PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU must beselected with a check mark to program thepersonalization features. If it is not selected, pressthe tune/select knob until the check markappears. If it is selected, the entire list of featureswill be available to program.

DRIVER GREETINGThis feature allows you to type in a customizedname or greeting that will appear on the displaywhenever the corresponding keyless accesstransmitter, 1 or 2, is used or Driver 1 or Driver 2is selected on the radio display.

If a customized name or greeting is notprogrammed, the system will show Driver 1 orDriver 2 to correspond with the numbers onthe back of the keyless access transmitters. In thiscase, the customized driver greeting feature isfactory shipped as off.

To turn the driver greeting feature on and toprogram a customized name or greeting, use thefollowing procedure:

1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU byfollowing the instructions listed previouslyunder “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”

2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVERGREETING is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to turn on theDRIVER GREETING feature.You will see a cursor on the screen.

4. Turn the tune/select knob until you reach thefirst letter you want; the letter will behighlighted. There is a complete alphabet withboth upper and lower case letters and thenumbers zero through nine. Also included arespaces and other non-letter characterssuch as the ampersand (&).

150

5. Press the tune/select knob once to select theletter. The letter will then appear on the displayand the cursor will advance to the next letter.If you make a mistake, press the F5 button,located on the radio, repeatedly to cycle backthrough all of the characters until you reachthe character you wish to change. Thenturn the tune/select knob until the letter youwant is highlighted and press the tune/selectknob to select the new letter.

6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until the name orgreeting you want is complete. You canprogram up to 16 characters.

The name or greeting you programmed is nowset. You can either exit the programming mode byfollowing the instructions later in this section orprogram the next feature available on your vehicleby pressing the F6 (BACK) button, located onthe radio, to return to the PERSONAL SETTINGSMENU. You will now see a check mark next tothe driver greeting menu item, which means thatthe driver greeting feature is on and a customizeddriver greeting is being used.

To turn off the customized driver greeting, and goback to displaying either Driver 1 or Driver 2,use the following procedure:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVERGREETING is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to turn on theDRIVER GREETING feature. The checkmark will be cleared and the customized drivergreeting is off.

The only way to correct a customized drivergreeting once you have exited the screen to spellthe name, is to turn the driver greeting featureoff, and then turn it back on.

151

KEY FOB REMINDERThis feature chirps the horn three times when thedriver’s door is closed and there is a keylessaccess transmitter left inside of the vehicle. Thiswill only occur when the vehicle is off.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF

Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode towhich the vehicle was programmed may havebeen changed since it left the factory.

To program the vehicle to a different mode, usethe following procedure:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEY FOBREMINDER is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back andforth between on and off.When the mode is turned on, a check markwill appear next to the feature name.

The mode you selected is now set. You can eitherexit the programming mode by following theinstructions later in this section or program thenext feature available on your vehicle.

REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you tochoose the features you would like to haveactivated when you engage the remote start onyour vehicle. These features include the climatecontrol system, the rear defogger, and theseat temperature, if your vehicle has this feature.Activating these features helps provide a morecomfortable vehicle upon entry. See “RemoteVehicle Start” under Keyless Access SystemOperation on page 88 for more information.

152

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until REMOTESTART is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back andforth between on and off.

When REMOTE START is on, a check mark willappear next to the feature name. You canthen choose to activate any or all of the followingfeatures by turning the tune/select knob tohighlight the feature, then pressing the knob toturn it on.

CLIMATE CONTROL: The climate control systemwill engage when the vehicle is started usingthe remote start feature. It will be at the sameclimate control setting that was last used by thedriver using that keyless entry transmitter.

REAR WINDOW DEFOG: If this feature is active,the rear defogger will engage when the vehicleis started using the remote start feature.

SEAT TEMP (Temperature) CONTROL: If yourvehicle has this feature and this feature isactive, the seats will be heated or cooled whenthe vehicle is started using the remote startfeature.

The mode you selected is now set. You can eitherexit the programming mode by following theinstructions later in this section or program thenext feature available on your vehicle by pressingthe F6 (BACK) button, located on the radio, toreturn to the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU.

153

REMOTE RECALL MEMORYIf your vehicle has the optional memory package,you will have this feature. When this feature isturned on, you can recall any previouslyprogrammed seat position and mirror positionwhen the unlock button on the keyless accesstransmitter is pressed.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF

Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,it was programmed to Mode 2 with the exceptionof recall seat to driver position which is on.The mode to which the vehicle was programmedmay have been changed since it left the factory.

To program the vehicle to a different mode,use the following procedure:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until REMOTERECALL MEMORY is highlighted.


If this feature is selected, START BUTTONRECALL cannot be selected.


START BUTTON RECALLIf your vehicle has the optional memory package,you will have this feature. When this feature isturned on, you can recall any previouslyprogrammed seat, mirror, and steering columnposition when the start button on the ignitionis pressed.

154

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until STARTBUTTON RECALL is highlighted.


If this feature is selected, REMOTE RECALLMEMORY cannot be selected.


AUTO EXIT SEATIf your vehicle has the optional memory package,you will have this feature. When this feature isturned on, you can recall any previouslyprogrammed exit position for the driver’s seatwhen the vehicle is off, the shift lever is inPARK (P), and the driver’s door is opened.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF


155



2. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTO EXITSEAT is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back andforth between on and off.When the mode is turned on, a check mark willappear in the box next to the feature name.


AUTO EXIT COLUMNIf your vehicle has the optional memory package,you will have this feature. When this feature isturned on, you can recall any previouslyprogrammed exit position for the steering columnwhen the vehicle is off, the shift lever is inPARK (P), and the driver’s door is opened.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTO EXITCOLUMN is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back andforth between on and off.When the mode is turned on, a check mark willappear in the box next to the feature name.


156

LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCKThis feature allows the exterior lamps to flashwhen the keyless access transmitter is usedto unlock the vehicle. All doors must be closed forthis feature to work, and the lamps will notflash if the parking lamps or headlamps are on.

If LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK is turned onand either KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCKor KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK is turned on, theexterior lamps will flash when the doors arepassively unlocked. See “KEYLESS FT (Front)DOOR UNLOCK” and “KEYLESS DOORSUNLOCK” later in this section for more information.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until LIGHTSFLASH AT UNLOCK is highlighted.



157

LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCKThis feature allows the exterior lamps to flashonce when the keyless access transmitter is usedto lock the vehicle. All doors must be closed forthis feature to work, and the lamps will not flash ifthe parking lamps or headlamps are on.

If LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK is turned on andeither KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK or KEYLESSDOORS UNLOCK is turned on, the exteriorlamps will flash when the doors are passivelyunlocked. See “KEYLESS FT (Front) DOORUNLOCK” and “KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK” laterin this section for more information.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until LIGHTSFLASH AT LOCK is highlighted.


You can select this feature by itself, or you cancombine it with Horn Chirps At Lock so thatboth the exterior lamps flash and the horn chirpswhen you lock your vehicle.


158

EXT. (Exterior) LIGHTS AT UNLOCKThis feature turns on the exterior lamps when thekeyless access transmitter is used to unlockthe vehicle. The lamps will remain on for about20 seconds unless a door is opened, the ignition isin Acc., on, or START, or the keyless accesstransmitter is used to lock the vehicle.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until EXT. LIGHTSAT UNLOCK is highlighted.



HORN CHIRPS AT LOCKThis feature sounds the horn once when thekeyless access transmitter is used to lockthe vehicle. All doors must be closed for thisfeature to work.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF


159



2. Turn the tune/select knob until HORN CHIRPSAT LOCK is highlighted.



TWILIGHT DELAYThis feature allows you to set the amount of timeyou want the exterior lamps to remain on afteryou exit the vehicle.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: 0:00 seconds (off)

Mode 2: 0:05 seconds



Mode 5: 1:30 minutes




Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode towhich the vehicle was programmed may havebeen changed since the vehicle left the factory.

160

To determine the mode to which the vehicle isprogrammed or to program the vehicle to adifferent mode, use the following procedure:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until TWILIGHTDELAY is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to scroll throughthe available delay settings and set yourselection.If you choose Mode 1, the exterior lamps willnot illuminate when you exit the vehicle.Only one mode can be selected at a time.


DRIVER UNLOCK AT OFFThis feature allows the driver’s door toautomatically unlock when the ignition isturned off.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVERUNLOCK AT OFF is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to switch betweenon and off.When the mode is turned on, a check markwill appear next to the feature name.


161

DOORS UNLOCK AT OFFThis feature allows all of the doors to automaticallyunlock when the ignition is turned off.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until DOORSUNLOCK AT OFF is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to switch betweenon and off.When the mode is turned on, a check markwill appear next to the feature name.


DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARKThe feature allows the driver’s door toautomatically unlock when the transmission isshifted into PARK (P).

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVERUNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted.

162



DOORS UNLOCK IN PARKThe feature allows all of the doors to automaticallyunlock when the transmission is shifted intoPARK (P).

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until DOORSUNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted.



163

KEYLESS FT (Front) DOOR UNLOCKThis feature automatically unlocks the appropriatefront door when you approach the vehicle withyour keyless access transmitter and pull therespective door handle. See Door Locks onpage 98 for more information.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS FTDOOR UNLOCK is highlighted.



KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCKThis feature automatically unlocks all of the doorswhen you approach the vehicle with yourkeyless access transmitter and pull either frontdoor handle. See Door Locks on page 98 for moreinformation.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF


164



2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESSDOORS UNLOCK is highlighted.



LOCK DELAYThis feature delays the locking of the vehicle’sdoors for eight seconds after a power doorlock switch or the lock button on the keylessaccess transmitter is pressed. The eight seconddelay occurs after the last door is closed. Ifthe keyless access transmitter is left inside of thevehicle, the doors will not lock.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until LOCK DELAYis highlighted.



165

KEYLESS LOCK DELAYThis feature allows you to select whether thedoors automatically lock during normal vehicle exit.When the ignition is turned off and all doorsbecome closed, the vehicle will determine howmany keyless access transmitters remain inthe vehicle interior. If at least one keyless accesstransmitter has been removed from the interiorof the vehicle, the doors will lock after 10 seconds.

For example, if there are two keyless accesstransmitters in the vehicle and one is removed, theother will be locked in. The keyless accesstransmitter locked in the vehicle can still be usedto start the vehicle or unlock the doors, ifneeded. A person approaching the outside of thelocked vehicle without an authorized keylessaccess transmitter, however, will not be able toopen the door, even with a transmitter in thevehicle.

You may temporarily disable the passive doorlocking feature by pressing the door unlock switchfor three seconds on an open door. Passivedoor locking will then remain disabled until a doorlock switch is pressed or until the power modetransitions from the off power mode.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESSLOCK DELAY is highlighted.



166

FRONT PASS (Passenger) WINDOW LOCKThis feature allows you to choose whether ornot to have the front passenger windowdeactivated as part of the window lockout button.If you would like the front passenger windowto be deactivated when the window lockout buttonis pushed, turn this feature on. If this feature isleft off, the window lockout button located on thedoor will deactivate only the rear windows.See Power Windows on page 105 for moreinformation.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until FRONT PASSWINDOW LOCK is highlighted.



CHIME VOLUME HIGHThis feature allows you to adjust the volume levelof the vehicle’s warning chimes. The chimevolume cannot be turned off, only adjusted.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: NORMAL

Mode 2: HIGH


167



2. Turn the tune/select knob until CHIMEVOLUME HIGH is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back andforth between the normal and high settings.A check mark indicates that the chime volumeis set to HIGH.


SUSPENSION MODEIf your vehicle has this feature, you can selectbetween performance or touring modes.Performance mode is used where road conditionsor personal preference demand more control.This setting provides more “feel” or response toroad conditions. Touring mode is used for normalcity and highway driving. This setting providesa smooth, soft ride.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: PERFORMANCE

Mode 2: TOURING




2. Turn the tune/select knob until SUSPENSIONMODE is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to enter theSUSPENSION MODE submenu.

4. Turn the tune/select knob to highlightTOURING or PERFORMANCE.

5. Press the tune/select knob to select thesetting.

168

The mode you selected is now set. You can eitherexit the programming mode by following theinstructions later in this section or program thenext feature available on your vehicle by pressingthe F6 (BACK) button, located on the radio, toreturn to the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU.

Exiting the Personal Settings MenuOnce you have finished making your selections onthe base audio system, you will automaticallyreturn to the main audio screen after 15 seconds.You can also press the F6 (BACK) button,located on the radio, to return to the main audioscreen.

Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheelIf your vehicle has the memory feature, you canprogram and recall memory settings for thefollowing features for up to two drivers:

• The driver’s seat position

• The outside rearview mirrors position

• The power tilt wheel and telescopic steeringcolumn position

The following settings and presets are setautomatically:

• The language, radio and XM™ presets, tone,volume, playback mode (AM/FM or CD), lastdisplayed stations, and compact discposition

• The last climate control setting

• The Head-Up Display (HUD) position, if yourvehicle has this feature

• Other personalization settings, for example,remote start settingsSee Vehicle Personalization on page 148.

For vehicles with the base audio system, memoryfeatures are programmed and recalled throughthe radio from the DRIVER SELECTION and theDRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenus. See“Entering the Driver Selection Submenu” and“Entering the Driver Exit Settings Submenu” laterin this section for more information on recallingand programming the memory settings using thebase audio system.

169

For vehicles with the Navigation system, memoryfeatures are programmed and recalled throughthe navigation display. See “Personalization” in theIndex of the Navigation System manual for moreinformation on programming and recalling thememory settings using the Navigation system.

For vehicles with the Navigation system, you canalso recall the memory features by using voicerecognition, if your vehicle has this feature.See “Voice Recognition” in the Index of theNavigation System manual for more information.

Entering the Driver SelectionSubmenuTo enter the memory programming mode for yourdriver settings, use the following procedure:

1. Be sure the ignition is either on, in Acc., or inRAP and place the transmission in PARK (P)or make sure that the vehicle speed isless than 6 mph (9 km/h).



4. Press the CNFG radio button to enter themain menu of the radio.

5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll toSETUP.

6. Press the tune/select knob to enter theSETUP menu.

7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll toDRIVER SELECTION.

8. Press the tune/select knob to enter theDRIVER SELECTION submenu. The followingitems will appear:

• DRIVER 1

• DRIVER 2

• RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS

• STORE DRIVER SETTINGS

170

Driver Selection Submenu ItemsDRIVER 1/DRIVER 2The numbers on the back of each keyless accesstransmitter correspond to DRIVER 1 andDRIVER 2. If you would like to recall or storedriver settings for the driver that does notcorrespond to the number on the back of thekeyless access transmitter that you are using,use the following procedure:1. Enter the memory programming mode for

your driver settings by following theinstructions listed previously under “Enteringthe Driver Selection Submenu.”

2. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu,turn the tune/select knob to highlight thedriver number that you want, either DRIVER 1or DRIVER 2.

3. Set your choice by pressing in thetune/select knob.

If you would like to recall or store driver settings forthe selected driver, see “RECALL DRIVERSETTINGS” or “STORE DRIVER SETTINGS”later in this section.If you would like to recall or store exit settings forthe selected driver, see “RECALL EXIT SETTINGS”or “STORE EXIT SETTINGS” later in this section.

RECALL DRIVER SETTINGSTo recall driver settings, use the followingprocedure:

1. Enter the memory programming mode foryour driver settings by following theinstructions listed previously under “Enteringthe Driver Selection Submenu.”

2. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu, turnthe tune/select knob to scroll to RECALLDRIVER SETTINGS and press in the knob.If the vehicle is in PARK (P), one beep willsound and your previously saved drivingposition will then be recalled.If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), three beepswill sound and your previously saveddriving position will not be recalled.

A memory recall can be stopped by pressing anymemory seat or mirror position button.

If you would like the stored driving positions to berecalled when unlocking your vehicle with thekeyless access transmitter or when starting yourvehicle, see “REMOTE RECALL MEMORY”or “START BUTTON RECALL” under VehiclePersonalization on page 148.

171

STORE DRIVER SETTINGSTo store driver settings, use the followingprocedure:1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat, the

outside rearview mirrors, and the steeringcolumn to a comfortable driving position.

2. Enter the memory programming mode foryour driver settings by following theinstructions listed previously under “Enteringthe Driver Selection Submenu.”

3. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu,turn the tune/select knob to scroll to STOREDRIVER SETTINGS and press in theknob. Two beeps will sound to confirm thatyour driver settings are saved.

4. Set the HUD position, if your vehicle has thisfeature, the climate control temperature, fanspeed and mode settings, the radio presets,tone, volume, playback mode (AM/FM,XM™, or CD), and compact disc position.Your memory settings are now programmed.Any changes that are made to the HUD,audio system, and climate controls whiledriving will be automatically stored when theignition is turned off.

5. Repeat the procedure for a second driver byprogramming the other driver number.

Entering the Driver Exit SettingsSubmenuTo enter the memory programming mode for yourexit settings, use the following procedure:1. Be sure the ignition is either on, in Acc., or in

RAP and place the transmission in PARK (P)or make sure that the vehicle speed isless than 6 mph (9 km/h).



4. Press the CNFG radio button to enter themain menu of the radio.

5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to SETUP.6. Press the tune/select knob to enter the

SETUP menu.7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to

DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS.8. Press the tune/select knob to enter the

DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu.The following items will appear:• RECALL EXIT SETTINGS• STORE EXIT SETTINGS

172

Driver Exit Settings Submenu ItemsRECALL EXIT SETTINGSTo recall exit settings, use the following procedure:

1. Enter the memory programming mode foryour exit settings by following the instructionslisted previously under “Entering the DriverExit Settings Submenu.”

2. From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu,turn the tune/select knob to scroll to RECALLEXIT SETTINGS and press in the knob.If the vehicle is in PARK (P), one beep willsound and your previously saved exit positionwill then be recalled.If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), three beepswill sound and your previously saved exitposition will not be recalled.A memory recall can be stopped by pressingany memory seat or mirror position button.

If you would like the stored exit positions to berecalled when your vehicle is in PARK (P),the vehicle is off, and the driver’s door is opened,see “AUTO EXIT SEAT” and “AUTO EXITCOLUMN” under Vehicle Personalization onpage 148.

STORE EXIT SETTINGSTo store exit settings, use the following procedure:

1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat,the outside rearview mirrors, and thesteering column to a comfortable exit position.

2. Enter the memory programming mode for yourexit settings by following the instructions listedpreviously under “Entering the Driver ExitSettings Submenu.”

3. From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu,turn the tune/select knob to scroll to STOREEXIT SETTINGS and press in the knob.Two beeps will sound to confirm that your newexit settings are saved.

4. Repeat the procedure for a second driver byprogramming the other driver number.

173

✍ NOTES

174

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 178Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 180Other Warning Devices ............................. 180Horn .......................................................... 180Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic

Steering Column .................................... 181Heated Steering Wheel ............................. 181Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 182Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 182Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 183Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System .......... 184Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 188Windshield Wipers ..................................... 189Rainsense™ II Wipers ............................... 190Windshield Washer .................................... 191Headlamp Washer ..................................... 192Cruise Control ........................................... 193Adaptive Cruise Control ............................. 197Headlamps ................................................ 211Wiper Activated Headlamps ....................... 215Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 216Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 216Fog Lamps ................................................ 217Twilight Sentinel® ...................................... 218Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................. 219

Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 220Entry Lighting ............................................ 220Parade Dimming ........................................ 220Reading Lamps ......................................... 221Battery Load Management ......................... 221Electric Power Management ...................... 221Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ............... 222Head-Up Display (HUD) ............................ 223Ultrasonic Rear Parking

Assist (URPA) ........................................ 226Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 228Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 229

Climate Controls ......................................... 230Dual Climate Control System ..................... 230Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 237Rear Climate Control System .................... 237Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 239

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 241Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 242Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 243Tachometer ............................................... 243Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 243Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 244Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 244

Section 3 Instrument Panel

175

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 245Charging System Light .............................. 247Brake System Warning Light ..................... 248Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 249Low Tire Pressure Warning Light .............. 249Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ........................................ 250Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ........................................ 251Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 251Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 252Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 255Security Light ............................................ 256Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 256Lights On Reminder .................................. 256Cruise Control Light .................................. 256Highbeam On Light ................................... 257Fuel Gage ................................................. 257

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 258DIC Controls and Displays ........................ 258DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 264Other Messages ........................................ 279

Audio System(s) ......................................... 280Setting the Time ........................................ 281Radio with CD ........................................... 282Using an MP3 ........................................... 297XM Radio Messages ................................. 303Navigation/Radio System ........................... 305Radio Personalization ................................ 305Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 309Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 310Radio Reception ........................................ 312Care of Your CDs ..................................... 313Care of the CD Player .............................. 313Diversity Antenna System .......................... 314XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 314

Section 3 Instrument Panel

176

✍ NOTES

177

Instrument Panel Overview

178

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 237.

B. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 220.Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. SeeDIC Controls and Displays on page 258.HUD Controls (If Equipped). See Head-UpDisplay (HUD) on page 223.

C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 182.Headlamp Controls. See Headlamps onpage 211. Cruise Control. See Cruise Controlon page 193. Adaptive Cruise Control (IfEquipped). See Adaptive Cruise Control onpage 197. Forward Collision Alert (FCA)(If Equipped). See Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System on page 184.

D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 242.

E. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. SeeWindshield Wipers on page 189.

F. Navigation/Radio System. See Audio System(s)on page 280 and Navigation/Radio Systemon page 305.

G. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 310. Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Button(If Equipped). See Adaptive Cruise Controlon page 197. Heated Steering Wheel Button (IfEquipped). See Heated Steering Wheel onpage 181.

H. Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic SteeringColumn. Power Tilt Wheel and TelescopicSteering Column on page 181.

I. Horn. See Horn on page 180.J. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on

page 111.K. Climate Control System. See Dual Climate

Control System on page 230.L. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard

Warning Flashers on page 180.M. Cupholders. See Cupholder(s) on page 146.N. Traction Control System Button. See Traction

Control System (TCS) on page 323.O. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission

Operation on page 116.P. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 146.

179

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedon the console, nearthe shift lever. SeeInstrument PanelOverview on page 178.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isnot in.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.

180

Power Tilt Wheel and TelescopicSteering Column

The power tilt andtelescope wheel controlis located on theoutboard side of thesteering column.

To operate the power tilt feature, move the controlup or down to tilt the steering wheel up or down.

To set the memory position, see VehiclePersonalization on page 148 and Memory Seat,Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 169.

To operate the power telescope feature, move thecontrol forward or rearward and the steeringwheel moves toward the front or rear of thevehicle.

Heated Steering WheelYour vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.

The button for thisfeature is located onthe steering wheel.

Press the bottom of the button to turn the heatedsteering wheel on or off. A light on the buttonwill display while the feature is on.

The steering wheel will take about three minutesto reach its maximum temperature.

181

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 182.

• O Headlamps. See Headlamps on page 211.

• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changeron page 183.

• Flash-To-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 188.

• - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 217.

• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control onpage 193.

• Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped). SeeAdaptive Cruise Control on page 197.

• Forward Collision Alert (FCA) (If Equipped).See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) Systemon page 184.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsTo signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. The lever returns automatically whenthe turn is complete.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster flashes in thedirection of the turnor lane change.

182

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts toflash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until thelane change is complete. The lever returns to itsoriginal position when it is released.

Rapid flashing of arrows when signaling for a turnor lane change may be caused by a burned-outsignal bulb. Other driver’s will not see the signal.

Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possibleaccidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbsif the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 487 formore information.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km),a warning chime will sound and the TURNSIGNAL ON message will appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) display. See “Turn SignalOn” under DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 264 for more information.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush forward on the turn signal/multifunctionlever to change the headlamps from low to highbeam. Pull the lever back and then release itto change from high to low beam.

If you turn the vehicle off with the high beams on,the next time you start your vehicle the lowbeams will be on.

To re-activate high beams, pull lever toward youand then push it forward again.

This light on theinstrument panel clusterwill be on, indicatinghigh-beam usage.

183

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)SystemIf your vehicle has this feature, be sure to readthis entire section before using it.The system operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause interference, and2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause interference, and2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.


The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system providesan audible and visual warning if you approach avehicle too rapidly. FCA also provides a visualwarning with no audible warning if you arefollowing another vehicle much too closely. FCAuses the Adaptive Cruise Control radar to detect avehicle directly ahead, in your path, within adistance of 328 ft (100 m) and operates atspeeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).

184

{CAUTION:

FCA is only a warning system and doesnot apply the brakes. When you areapproaching a vehicle or object too rapidlyor when you are following a vehicle tooclosely that is ahead of you, FCA may notprovide you with enough time to avoid acollision. FCA is not designed to warn thedriver of pedestrians or animals. Yourcomplete attention is always required whiledriving and you should be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes. For moreinformation, see Defensive Driving onpage 316.

The Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) controls arelocated on the end ofthe multifunction lever.

9 (Off): This position turns the system off.

R (On): This position turns the system on.

To enable FCA, move the Adaptive Cruise Controlswitch to on. To disable FCA, move the switchto off.

185

Make sure the Head-Up Display is on andproperly adjusted. If the HUD is not on, FCA willnot be enabled and you will not be providedwith FCA audible and visual warnings. SeeHead-Up Display (HUD) on page 223 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

• On winding roads, FCA may not detecta vehicle ahead. You could crash intoa vehicle ahead of you. Do not rely onFCA on winding roads.

• When weather limits visibility, such asin fog, rain, or snow, FCA performanceis limited. There may not be enoughwarning distance to the vehicle in frontof you. Do not rely on FCA in lowvisibility conditions.

{CAUTION:

When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive CruiseControl switch is on. If you press anotherAdaptive Cruise Control button, you mightgo into cruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and even losecontrol. Be careful not to press adaptivecruise buttons unless you want to usecruise control.

186

Warning the DriverThe alert symbol willflash on the HUD anda warning beep willsound when driveraction may be required.

The driver warning is active when:

• You are approaching a vehicle too quickly.

• You are following a vehicle ahead muchtoo closely.

See Defensive Driving on page 316 for moreinformation.

Detecting the Vehicle AheadThe vehicle ahead symbol will only appear on theHUD when a vehicle ahead of you is detected inyour path. If this symbol does not appear, ordisappears briefly, FCA will not respond to vehiclesyou may see ahead. The symbol may disappear oncurves, highway exit ramps, or hills. Also, whenanother vehicle enters the same lane as you, theFCA system will not detect the vehicle until it iscompletely in your driving lane.

{CAUTION:

When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar isblocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may notdetect a vehicle ahead. FCA may nothelp you avoid a collision under theseconditions. Do not use FCA when the radaris blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. Keep yourradar clean. See “Cleaning the System”under Adaptive Cruise Control on page 197.

{CAUTION:

FCA may not detect and warn soonenough to stationary or slow-movingvehicles or other objects ahead of you.You could crash into an object aheadof you. Do not rely on FCA whenapproaching stationary or slow-movingvehicles or other objects.

187

Unnecessary WarningsFCA may occasionally provide an unnecessarywarning to guard rails, signs, and other stationaryobjects. This is normal operation, your vehicledoes not need service.

Other MessagesThere are three messages that may appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC). They areCLEAN RADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READYand SERVICE RADAR CRUISE. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 264.

Cleaning the SystemThe radar can become blocked by snow, ice, ordirt. If so, you may need to turn off the engine andclean the lens. See “Cleaning the System”under Adaptive Cruise Control on page 197.

Flash-to-PassThis feature allows you to use the high-beamheadlamps to signal the driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you to use this feature. When you do this,the following will occur:

• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or inDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, thehigh-beam headlamps will turn on. They willstay on as long as you hold the leverthere. Release the lever to turn them off.

• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, theywill switch to low beam. To return tohigh-beam, push the lever away from you.

188

Windshield Wipers

The lever on the right side of the steering columnoperates the windshield wipers.

7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it fora single wiping cycle. The lever will return to itsoriginal position. For more cycles, hold thelever down before releasing it.

9 (Off): Put the lever in this position to turn offthe wipers.

& (Delay): Put the lever in this position to set adelay between wipes. Turn the delay adjustmentband to set the length of the delay.

x (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set thelength of the delay between wipes when using thedelay feature. The closer you move the bandtoward mist, the longer the delay. The windshieldwiper lever must be in delay for this feature to work.

6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this positionfor slow, steady wiping cycles.

1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this positionfor rapid wiping cycles.

If the windshield wipers are in use for aboutsix seconds while you are driving, the exteriorlamps will come on automatically if the exteriorlamp control is in AUTO. See Wiper ActivatedHeadlamps on page 215 for more information.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they’re frozen to thewindshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If theblades do become damaged, install new blades.For more information, see Windshield Wiper BladeReplacement on page 419.

189

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. Acircuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Your vehicle (STS-V only) is equipped with afeature that disables the wiper system when thehood is open and your vehicle is stopped. Openingthe hood will automatically park the wipers ifthey are not parked. This prevents the wipers frominterfering with hood operation. Be sure thehood is not opened when you require the vehicle’swipers out of the park position, such as whenchanging the wiper blades.

Rainsense™ II WipersIf your vehicle has this feature, the moisturesensor is mounted on the interior side of thewindshield behind the rearview mirror. It is used toautomatically operate the wipers by monitoringthe amount of moisture build-up on the windshield.Wipes occur as needed to clear the windshielddepending on driving conditions and the sensitivitysetting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes willoccur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur morefrequently. The Rainsense™ wipers operate in a

delay mode as well as a continuous low or highspeed as needed. If the system is left on for longperiods of time, occasional wipes may occurwithout any moisture on the windshield. This isnormal and indicates that the Rainsense™ systemis activated.

To activate the Rainsense™ system, turn thewiper band to delay mode and select one of thefour sensitivity levels indicated on the wiper stalk.The position closest to off is the lowest sensitivitysetting, level one. This allows more rain or snow tocollect on the windshield between wipes. Turningthe wiper band away from you to higher sensitivitylevels increases the sensitivity of the system andfrequency of wipes. The highest sensitivity setting,level four, is closest to low. A single wipe will occureach time you turn the wiper stalk to a highersensitivity level to indicate that the sensitivity levelhas been increased.

Notice: Going through an automatic car washwith the wipers on can damage them. Turnthe wipers off when going through anautomatic car wash.

190

The mist and wash cycles operate as normal andare not affected by the Rainsense™ function.The Rainsense™ system can be overridden at anytime by manually turning the wiper band to lowor high speed.

When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps willturn on automatically. The headlamps will turnoff again once the wipers turn off if it is lightenough outside. If it is dark, they will remain on.See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 215.

Notice: Do not place stickers or other itemson the exterior glass surface directly in front ofthe moisture sensor. Doing this could causethe moisture sensor to malfunction.

Windshield Washer

K (Washer Fluid): The lever on the right sideof the steering column also controls the windshieldwasher. There is a button at the end of thelever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield,press the button and hold it. The washer will sprayuntil you release the button. The wipers willcontinue to clear the window for about six secondsafter the button is released and then stop orreturn to your preset speed.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoiris low, the message CHECK WASHER FLUIDwill appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)display. It will take 60 seconds after the bottleis refilled for this message to turn off. Forinformation on the correct washer fluid mixture touse, see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 404and Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 516.

191

Headlamp WasherYour vehicle may have headlamp washers.The headlamp washers clear debris from theheadlamp lenses.

The headlamp washers are located to the insideof the headlamps.

To wash the headlamps, press the washer buttonlocated at the end of the windshield wiper lever.The headlamps will be washed after the fifth pressof the windshield washer button.

The headlamps must be on to be washed. If theheadlamps are off, only the windshield will bewashed when the washer button is pressed.If the washer fluid is low, the headlamp washerswill not work.

See Windshield Washer on page 191 for additionalinformation.

192

Cruise Control

These controls arelocated on the end ofthe multifunction lever.

9 (Off): Move to this position to turn thesystem off.

R (On): Move to this position to turn on the system.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move to this position tomake the vehicle resume a previously set speed orto accelerate when cruise is already active.

T (Set/Decrease): Press this button to set thespeed or to decrease the speed when cruiseis already active.

With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph(40 km/h) or more can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. Thiscan really help on long trips. Cruise control doesnot work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

193

If you apply your brakes, the cruise control willshut off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when theTraction Control System (TCS) begins to limitwheel spin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 323 and StabiliTrak® System on page 326.When road conditions allow you to safely useit again, you may turn the cruise control back on.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Press in the set button at the end of the leverand release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

This light on theinstrument panel clusterwill come on whilecruise control is on.

194

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set the cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This, ofcourse, disengages the cruise control. But it doesnot need to be reset.

Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, you can move the cruise control switchbriefly from on to resume/accelerate.

You will go right back up to your chosen speedand stay there.

If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate thevehicle will keep going faster until you release theswitch or apply the brake. Do not hold theswitch at resume/accelerate, unless you want thevehicle to go faster.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the set button at the end of thelever, then release the button and theaccelerator pedal. You will now cruise at thehigher speed.

• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to thedesired speed, and then release the switch. Toincrease your speed in very small amounts,move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.Each time you do this, your vehicle will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

If using the accelerator pedal and the set button atend of the lever to increase cruise set speed, yournew set speed must be at least 5 mph higher thancurrent speed for this method to work. If it is not5 mph higher, switch cruise switch off, then on, andthen reset your speed using the set button.

195

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to reduce your speed whileusing cruise control:

• Press in the button at the end of the lever untilyou reach the lower speed desired, thenrelease it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, brieflypress the set button. Each time you do this,you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control works on hills dependsupon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills, you might haveto step on the accelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle’s speed. When going downhill, you mighthave to brake to keep the vehicle’s speed down.Applying the brake will turn off the cruise control. Ifyou need to apply the brake due to the grade of thedownhill slope, you might not want to attempt to useyour cruise control feature.

Ending Cruise ControlTo end a cruise control session, step lightly on thebrake pedal.

Stepping on the brake pedal will end the currentcruise control session only. Move the cruise controlswitch to off to turn off the system completely.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, the cruise control set speed memoryis erased.

196

Adaptive Cruise ControlIf your vehicle has this feature, be sure to readthis entire section before using it.

The system operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.


1. This device may not cause interference, and



1. This device may not cause interference, and



Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement totraditional cruise control and is not a safetysystem. It allows you to keep cruise controlengaged in moderate traffic conditions withouthaving to constantly reset your cruise control.Adaptive Cruise Control uses radar to detect avehicle directly ahead in your path, within adistance of 328 ft (100 m), and operates at speedsabove 25 mph (40 km/h). When it is engaged bythe driver, the system can apply limited braking oracceleration of the vehicle, automatically, tomaintain a selected follow distance to the vehicleahead. The vehicle’s braking during AdaptiveCruise Control is comparable to a person applyingmoderate pressure to the vehicle’s brake pedal.

197

To disengage Adaptive Cruise Control, apply thebrake. If no vehicle is in your path, your vehiclewill react like traditional cruise control.

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control will not applyhard braking or bring the vehicle to acomplete stop. It will not respond tostopped vehicles, pedestrians or animals.When you are approaching a vehicle orobject, Adaptive Cruise Control may nothave time to slow your vehicle enough toavoid a collision. Your complete attentionis always required while driving and youshould be ready to take action and applythe brakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving on page 316.

{CAUTION:

• On winding roads, Adaptive CruiseControl may not detect a vehicleahead. You could crash into a vehicleahead of you. Do not use AdaptiveCruise Control on winding roads.

• Adaptive Cruise Control may not havetime to slow your vehicle enough toavoid a crash when you are driving inconditions where vehicles maysuddenly slow or stop ahead of you,enter your lane, or cross your vehicle’spath. If you are driving in theseconditions, do not use Adaptive CruiseControl. The warning beep and alertsymbol may indicate that you aredriving in conditions where AdaptiveCruise Control should not be used. See“Alerting the Driver” in this section.


198


• On slippery roads, fast changes intire traction can cause needlesswheel spinning, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

• When weather limits visibility, such aswhen in fog, rain, or snow conditions,Adaptive Cruise Control performanceis limited. There may not be enoughdistance to adapt to the changingtraffic conditions. Do not use cruisecontrol when visibility is low.

The Adaptive Cruisecontrols are located onthe end of themultifunction lever.

9 (Off): This position turns the system off.

R (On): This position turns the system on.

S (Resume/Increase): Push the switch to thissymbol to make the vehicle resume to a previouslyset speed or to increase the set speed whenAdaptive Cruise Control is already active.

T (Set/Decrease): Press this button to set thespeed or to decrease the set speed whenAdaptive Cruise Control is already active.

199

Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control Withthe Set Button

{CAUTION:

If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Controlswitch on when you are not using cruise,you might hit a button and go into cruisewhen you do not want to. You could bestartled and even lose control. Keep theAdaptive Cruise Control switch off untilyou want to use cruise control.

{CAUTION:

If you operate Adaptive Cruise Controlwithout your Head-up Display (HUD)properly adjusted, your Adaptive CruiseControl settings may not be visible. Youcould forget your settings and be startledby Adaptive Cruise Control response andeven lose control. Keep your HUD on andproperly adjusted when using AdaptiveCruise Control.

The set speed is selected by the driver. This is thespeed you will travel if there is no vehicledetected in your path.

200

To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following:

1. Make sure the Head-Up Display (HUD) ison and properly adjusted. You cannotengage Adaptive Cruise Control unless theHUD is on. See Head-Up Display (HUD)on page 223 for more information.

2. Move the switch to on.

3. Get up to the speed you want.

4. Press in the set button at the end of the leverand release it.

5. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it mayimmediately apply the brakes if it detects a vehicleahead is too close or moving slower than yourvehicle.

This symbol willappear on the Head-UpDisplay (HUD) toindicate that AdaptiveCruise Control is active.The number indicatesthe set speed.

See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 223 formore information.

Make sure the set speed is visible on the HUD soyou know the speed your vehicle will accelerate to ifa vehicle is not detected in your path. Keep in mindspeed limits, surrounding traffic speeds andweather conditions when adjusting your set speed.

If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control whenthe traction control system begins to limit wheelspin, the Adaptive Cruise Control will automaticallydisengage. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 323 and StabiliTrak® System on page 326.When road conditions allow you to safely use itagain, you may turn the Adaptive Cruise Controlback on.

United States versionshown, Canada similar

201

Increasing Set Speed While Using AdaptiveCruise ControlThere are two ways to increase the set speed:

• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.Press the set button at the end of the lever,then release the button and the acceleratorpedal. You will now cruise at the higher speed.

• Move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch fromon to resume/increase. Hold it there until thedesired set speed is displayed in the HUD,then release the switch. To increase your setspeed in very small amounts, move theswitch briefly to resume/increase. Each timeyou do this, your vehicle set speed willincrease by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until thesystem determines there is not a vehicle infront of you. At that point, your vehicle speed willincrease to the set speed.

Decreasing Set Speed While UsingAdaptive Cruise ControlPress in the set/decrease button on the end of thelever until you reach the lower speed you want,then release it.

To slow down in very small amounts, briefly pressthe set/decrease button. Each time you do this,your set speed will be 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your Adaptive Cruise Control ata desired speed and then you apply the brake.This will disengage the Adaptive Cruise Control.But you do not need to reset it.

Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, move the Adaptive Cruise Controlswitch briefly from on to resume/increase. AdaptiveCruise Control will be engaged with the previouslychosen set speed.

202

Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)When the system detects a slower moving vehicle,it will adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintainthe follow distance (gap) you select.

Use the GAP button onthe steering wheel toadjust the followdistance.

Press the top of the button to increase thedistance or the bottom of the button to decreasethe distance. The first button press will showyou the current follow distance setting on the HUD.Your current follow distance setting will bemaintained until you change it.

There are six follow distances to choose from. Thefollow distance selection ranges from near to far(one second to two seconds follow time). The

distance maintained for a selected follow distancewill vary based on vehicle speed. The fasterthe vehicle speed the further back you will follow.Consider traffic and weather conditions whenselecting the follow distance. The range ofselectable distances may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions. If you prefer totravel at a follow distance farther than AdaptiveCruise Control allows, disengage the systemand drive manually.

A graphic on the HUD indicates the selectedfollow distance. This picture shows a maximumfollow distance. The vehicles will move closertogether as you select a smaller follow distance.

United States version shown, Canada similar

203

Alerting the Driver

The alert symbol willflash on the HUD and awarning beep willsound when driveraction is required.

Driver action is required when:

• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficientbraking because you are approaching avehicle too rapidly.

• The vehicle speed drops below about20 mph (32 km/h).

• A temporary condition prohibits AdaptiveCruise Control from operating. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 264 for moreinformation.

• A malfunction is detected in the system. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 264for more information.

See Defensive Driving on page 316.

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control has only limitedbraking ability to slow your vehicle. Insome cases, Adaptive Cruise Control maynot have time to slow your vehicle enoughto avoid a collision. Be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes yourself. SeeDefensive Driving on page 316.

204

Approaching and Following a Vehicle

The vehicle aheadsymbol will only appearon the HUD when avehicle ahead isdetected in your path.

If this symbol does not appear, or disappearsbriefly, Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond tovehicles you may see ahead.

{CAUTION:

When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar isblocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may notdetect a vehicle ahead. Adaptive CruiseControl may not have time to slow yourvehicle enough to avoid a collision.



Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control whenthe radar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.Keep your radar clean. See “Cleaning theSystem” later in this section.

Adaptive Cruise Control will, automatically, slowyour vehicle down when approaching a slowermoving vehicle. It will then adjust your speed tofollow the vehicle in front at the selected followdistance. Your speed will increase or decrease tofollow the vehicle in front of you but will notexceed the set speed. It may apply limited braking,if necessary. When braking is active, your brakelights will come on. It may feel or sound differentthan if you were applying the brakes yourself. Thisis normal.

205

Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control may not detectand react to stationary or slow-movingvehicles or other objects ahead of you.You could crash into an object ahead ofyou. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Controlwhen approaching stationary orslow-moving vehicles or other objects.

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control may not detectand react to stationary or slow-movingvehicles or other objects ahead of you.Your vehicle may accelerate towardobjects, such as a stopped vehicle thatsuddenly appears after the lead vehiclechanges lanes. Your complete attention isalways required while driving and youshould be ready to take action and applythe brakes.

206

Low-Speed DeactivationIf your speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) whilefollowing a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Controlwill begin to disengage. The driver alert symbolon the HUD will flash and the warning beepwill sound. The driver must take action sinceAdaptive Cruise Control will not slow the vehicleto a stop.

Deactivation When Head-Up Display isTurned OffIf you turn the HUD off when Adaptive CruiseControl is engaged, it will begin to disengage. Awarning beep will sound and the message RADARCRUISE NOT READY will appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 264 for additionalinformation. If Adaptive Cruise Control was brakingwhen the HUD is turned off, the braking willcontinue briefly.

Passing a Vehicle/Adaptive CruiseControl OverrideIf you need to increase speed to pass a vehicle, usethe accelerator pedal. While you are doing this, thesystem will not automatically apply the brakes. APEDAL APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE message willappear on the HUD. See Head-Up Display (HUD)on page 223 for additional information. Once youpass the vehicle and remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal, Adaptive Cruise Control willreturn to normal operation and be able to apply thebrakes, if needed.

{CAUTION:

If you rest your foot on the acceleratorpedal, the system will not automaticallyapply the brakes. You could crash into avehicle ahead of you. Do not rest yourfoot on the accelerator pedal when usingAdaptive Cruise Control.

207

Curves in the Road

{CAUTION:

Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitationsin curves, it may respond to a vehicle inanother lane, or may not have time toreact to a vehicle in your lane. You couldcrash into a vehicle ahead of you, or losecontrol of your vehicle. Give extraattention in curves and be ready to usethe brakes if necessary. Select anappropriate speed while driving in curves.

Adaptive Cruise Control may operate differently ina sharp curve. It may reduce your speed if thecurve is too sharp.

When following a vehicle and entering a curve,Adaptive Cruise Control could lose track ofthe vehicle in your lane and accelerate yourvehicle. When this happens, the vehicle aheadsymbol will not appear on the HUD.

208

Adaptive Cruise Control may detect a vehicle thatis not in your lane and apply the brakes.

Adaptive Cruise Control may, occasionally,provide a driver alert and/or braking that youconsider unnecessary. It could respond to signs,guardrails and other stationary objects whenentering or exiting a curve. This is normaloperation. Your vehicle does not need service.

Highway Exit Ramps

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track ofthe vehicle ahead and accelerate up toyour set speed while entering or onhighway exit ramps. You could be startledby this acceleration and even lose controlof the vehicle. Disengage Adaptive CruiseControl before entering a highway exitramp. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Controlwhile entering or on exit ramps.

209

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

If another vehicle enters the same lane as you,Adaptive Cruise Control will not detect the vehicleuntil it is completely in the lane. Be ready totake action and apply the brakes yourself.

Using Adaptive Cruise Controls on Hillsand When Towing a Trailer

How well Adaptive Cruise Control will work on hillsand when towing a trailer depends on yourspeed, vehicle load, traffic conditions and the

steepness of the hills. It may not detect a vehiclein your lane while driving on hills. When goingup steep hills, you may want to use the acceleratorpedal to maintain your speed. When goingdownhill when towing a trailer, you may want tobrake to keep your speed down. Applying thebrake disengages the system. You may choosenot to use Adaptive Cruise Control on steephills when towing a trailer.

Disengaging Adaptive Cruise ControlTo disengage the system, apply the brake pedalor move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch tooff. Adaptive Cruise Control information willnot appear on the HUD when the system is notengaged.

Erasing Set Speed MemoryWhen you turn the Adaptive Cruise Control switchor the ignition off, the set speed memory is erased.

210

Other MessagesThere are three messages that may appear on theDIC. They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE,RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and CLEANRADAR. These messages will appear to indicatea problem with the Adaptive Cruise Control.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 264for more information.

Cleaning the SystemThe radar can become blocked by snow, ice ordirt. If so, you may need to turn off the engine andclean the lens. Remember, do not use AdaptiveCruise Control in icy conditions, or when visibility islow, such as in fog, rain or snow.

The emblem/lens is located in the center ofthe grille.

To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with asoft cloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens,engage the Adaptive Cruise Control. If you areunable to do so, see your dealer.

Headlamps

The exterior lamp control is located in the middleof the turn signal/multifunction lever.

O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the controlwith this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has four positions:

O (On/Off): Turn the control to this position toturn off all lamps and automatic lighting featuresincluding Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) andIntelliBeam™.

211

This is a momentary switch that springs back to theAUTO position when released. An AUTOMATICLIGHTS ON message appears on the DIC whenautomatic lights are enabled or an AUTOMATICLIGHTS OFF message appears on the DIC whenthe automatic lights are disabled.

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to put the headlamps in automatic mode.AUTO mode, turns the exterior lamps on andoff depending upon how much light is availableoutside of the vehicle.

Due to the switch design, the automatic lights maybe disabled even if the control is in the AUTOposition.

To enable automatic lighting do any of thefollowing:

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to offand release the switch. It returns back to theAUTO position by itself.

• Turn the headlamp control from the parkinglamp position to AUTO.

• Turn the headlamp control from the headlampposition to AUTO.

To disable automatic lighting do any of thefollowing:

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to offand release the switch. It returns back to theAUTO position by itself.

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to theparking lamp position.

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to theheadlamp position.

Disabling automatic lighting disables the automaticheadlamp operation, DRL, and IntelliBeam™High-Beams (if the vehicle has them).

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the headlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

212

IntelliBeam™ Intelligent High-BeamHeadlamp Control SystemIf your vehicle has this feature, be sure to readthis entire section before using it.

IntelliBeam™ is an enhancement to the vehicle’sheadlamp system. Using a digital light sensorlocated on the back of the rearview mirror,this system turns the high-beam headlamps onand off according to surrounding traffic conditions.

The IntelliBeam™ system turns the high-beamheadlamps on when it is dark enough, there is noother traffic present, and the IntelliBeam™system is enabled.

Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam™

AUTO3 (IntelliBeam™ On/Off): Pressand release the IntelliBeam™ button on the insiderear view mirror. The IntelliBeam™ indicator onthe mirror turns on. Once the system hasbeen turned on, it remains on each time thevehicle is started. Additionally, the IntelliBeam™system must be enabled.

To enable the IntelliBeam™ System, turn theexterior lamp control to AUTO, with the turnsignal/multifunction lever in its neutral position.

The High-Beam On Light appears on theinstrument panel cluster when the high-beams areon. See Highbeam On Light on page 257. Yourvehicle has variable intensity high-beams.The high-beam indicator on the instrument panelcluster comes on as soon as the high-beamsstart to come on, and remains on until thehigh-beams have completely turned off. Allvehicles that have IntelliBeam™, however, quicklyturn off the high-beams if the system detectsthe sudden presence of vehicle lights ahead.

Driving with IntelliBeam™IntelliBeam™ only activates the high-beams whendriving over 20 mph (32 km/h).

The high-beam headlamps remain on, under thecontrol of IntelliBeam™, until any of the followingsituations occur:

• The system detects an approaching vehicle’sheadlamps.

• The system detects a preceding vehicle’staillamps.

• The outside light is bright enough thathigh-beam headlamps are not required.

213

• The high-beam headlamps are manuallyturned on or you use the flash-to-pass feature.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 183 and Flash-to-Pass on page 188.When either of these conditions occur,the IntelliBeam™ feature is temporarilydisabled until the high-beam stalk is returnedto the neutral position. If either of theseconditions occur and IntelliBeam™ alreadyhas the high-beam headlamps on, theIntelliBeam™ feature is disabled and theIntelliBeam™ light in the mirror turns off.

• The exterior lamp control is turned to anysetting except AUTO.When this occurs, IntelliBeam™ is disableduntil the control is turned back to theAUTO position and the AUTOMATIC LIGHTSON message displays on the DIC.

• The IntelliBeam™ system is turned off at theinside rearview mirror.

• The vehicle’s speed drops below15 mph (24 km/h).

IntelliBeam™ may not turn off the high-beams ifthe system cannot detect other vehicle’s lampsbecause of any of the following:

• The others vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing,damaged, obstructed from view, or otherwiseundetected.

• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered withdirt, snow and/or road spray.

• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detecteddue to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, roadspray, mist, or other airborne obstructions.

• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked, orobstructed by something that blocks the viewof the IntelliBeam™ light sensor.

• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice,dirt, haze, or other obstructions.

• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front endof the vehicle points upward, causing theIntelliBeam™ sensor to aim high andnot detect headlamps and taillamps.

• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.

You might need to manually disable or cancel thehigh-beam headlamps by turning the low-beamheadlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.

214

Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam™ atthe Rearview MirrorIntelliBeam™ can be disabled and reset to theoriginal factory setting by using the controls on theinside rearview mirror.

AUTO3 (IntelliBeam™ On/Off): To disable thesystem, press this button on the inside rearviewmirror. The IntelliBeam™ indicator turns offand does not come back on until the IntelliBeam™button is pressed again.

When IntelliBeam™ has turned on the high-beams,pull or push the high-beam stalk. This disablesIntelliBeam™ and the IntelliBeam™ indicatoron the rearview mirror turns off. To re-enableIntelliBeam™, press the IntelliBeam™ button onthe mirror.

A different sensitivity setting is available for dealerdiagnostics. This is done by pushing and holdingthis button for 20 seconds until the light flashesthree times. If you accidentally activate this, thevehicle’s setting automatically resets each time theignition is turned off and then on again; otherwise,refer to the text above for resetting the system.

Cleaning the IntelliBeam™ Light Sensor

The light sensor islocated on the inside ofthe vehicle at the back ofthe rearview mirror.

Clean the light sensor window, periodically, usingglass cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe thesensor window. Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the surface of the sensor window.

Wiper Activated HeadlampsThis feature activates the headlamps and parkinglamps after the windshield wipers have been inuse for about six seconds. For this feature to work,automatic lighting must be enabled. SeeHeadlamps on page 211 for additional information.

When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activatedheadlamps will immediately turn off. They will alsoturn off if the windshield wiper control is turned off.

215

Headlamps on ReminderA warning chime will sound if the exterior lampcontrol is left on in either the headlamp or parkinglamp position and the driver’s door is openedwith the ignition off. See Lights On Reminder onpage 256 for additional information.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make the turn signal lampscome on when the following conditions are met:

• It is still daylight and the ignition is on,

• the automatic lights are enabled, and

• the transmission is not in PARK (P).

When DRL are on, only your front turn signallamps will be on. No other exterior lamps will beon when the DRL are being used. Your instrumentpanel will not be lit.

When the automatic lights are enabled and it is darkenough outside, the DRL will turn off and thelow-beam headlamps will turn on. When it is brightenough outside, the low-beam headlamps will gooff, and the DRL will turn back on. If you start yourvehicle in a dark garage, the automatic headlampsystem will come on immediately. Once you leavethe garage, it will take about one minute for theautomatic headlamp system to change to DRL if itis light outside. During that delay, your instrumentpanel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Makesure your instrument panel brightness lever is in thefull bright position. See Instrument Panel Brightnesson page 220.To operate your vehicle with the DRL off, turn theexterior lamp control off and then do one of thefollowing:• Turn the exterior lamp control to the parking

lamp position.• Turn the exterior lamp control to the headlamp

position.• Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO to

off and back to AUTO.

216

An AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF message willappear on the DIC, showing that automatic lightinghas been disabled.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

Light Sensor

The light sensor for the DRL is located on top ofthe instrument panel. If you cover the sensor, it willread dark, and the exterior lamps may come onwhen you do not need them.

Fog LampsUse the fog lamps for better vision in foggy ormisty conditions.

The fog lamp controls are located on the turnsignal/multifunction lever.

- (Fog Lamps): The band with this symbol isused to turn the fog lamps on and off.

The parking lamps must be on for the fog lampsto work.

To turn the fog lamps on, turn the fog lamp bandon the lever up to the dot and release it. Theband will return to its original position.

To turn the fog lamps off, turn the fog lamp bandup to the dot and release it. The band willreturn to its original position, and the fog lampswill turn off. If the high-beam headlamps are turnedon, the fog lamps will also turn off. They will turnback on again when you switch back to low-beamheadlamps.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

217

Twilight Sentinel®

Twilight Sentinel® can turn your lamps on and offfor you.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panelmakes the Twilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it isnot covered.

With Twilight Sentinel® the following will happen:

• When it is dark enough outside, the frontturn signal lamps (DRL) will go off, andthe headlamps and parking lamps will comeon. The other lamps that come on withheadlamps will also come on.

• When it is bright enough outside, theheadlamps will go off, and the front turn signallamps (DRL) will come on, as long as theexterior lamp switch is in the off position.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system will come onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it willtake about one minute for the automatic headlampsystem to change to DRL if it is light outside.During that delay, the instrument panel clustermight not be as bright as usual. Make surethe instrument panel brightness control is in fullbright position. See Instrument Panel Brightnesson page 220 for more information.

You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, evenwhen it is dark outside. First set the parkingbrake while the ignition is in OFF/ACCESSORY.Then start the vehicle. The lamps will stay off untilthe parking brake is released.

218

Twilight Sentinel® also provides exteriorillumination as you leave the vehicle. If TwilightSentinel® has turned on the lamps when you turnoff the ignition, the lamps will remain on until:

• The exterior lamp switch is moved from off tothe parking lamp position.

• A delay time that you select has elapsed.

See Vehicle Personalization on page 148 to selectthe delay time that you want. You can alsoselect no delay time.

If the ignition is turned off with the exterior lampswitch in the parking lamp or headlamp position,the Twilight Sentinel® delay will not occur.The lamps will turn off as soon as the switch isturned off.

As with any vehicle, the regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Exterior Lighting Battery SaverIf the parking lamps or headlamps have beenleft on, the exterior lamps will turn off about10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. Thisprotects against draining the battery in case youhave accidentally left the headlamps or parkinglamps on. The battery saver does not work if theheadlamps are turned on after the ignition isturned off.

If you need to leave the lamps on for more than10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control toturn the lamps back on.

219

Instrument Panel BrightnessThis feature controls thebrightness of theinstrument panel lights.

Press in the center knob on the DIC control paneluntil the knob pops out. Then turn the knobclockwise to brighten the lights or counterclockwiseto dim them. If you turn the knob completelyclockwise, the interior lamps will turn on.

Entry LightingThe entry lighting system turns on the reading anddome lamps and the backlighting to the exteriorlamp control when a door is opened or if youpress the remote keyless entry transmitterunlock button. If activated by the transmitter, thelighting will remain active for about 25 seconds.The entry lighting system uses the light sensor; itmust be dark outside in order for the lamps toturn on. The lamps turn off about 25 seconds afterthe last door is closed. They will dim to off if theignition is on, or immediately deactivate if thepower locks are activated.

Parade DimmingThis feature prohibits dimming of the instrumentpanel displays and backlighting during daylighthours when the key is in the ignition and theheadlamps are on. This feature operates with thelight sensor and is fully automatic. When thelight sensor reads darkness outside and theparking lamps are active, the instrument paneldisplays can be adjusted by turning the instrumentpanel brightness knob. See Instrument PanelBrightness on page 220 for additional information.

Base Level Shown,Uplevel Similar

220

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located on the overheadconsole. These lamps come on automatically whenany door is opened.

For manual operation, press the button next toeach lamp to turn it on or off.

If the reading lamps are left on, they automaticallyshut off 10 minutes after the ignition has beenturned off.

Battery Load ManagementThe battery load management feature is designedto monitor the vehicle’s electrical load anddetermine when the battery is in a heavy dischargecondition. During times of high electrical loading,the engine may idle at a higherrevolutions per minute (rpm) setting than normal tomake sure the battery charges. High electricalloads may occur when several of the following areon: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rearwindow defogger, the climate control fan at highspeeds, heated seats and engine cooling fans.

If the battery continues to discharge, even with theengine idling at a higher rpm setting, someelectrical loads will automatically be reduced.When this occurs, the rear window defogger maytake slightly longer to clear the glass and thefan may cut back to a lower speed. For morebattery saving information, see “Battery SaverActive Message” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 264.

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)that estimates the battery’s temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltage for bestperformance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC), youmay see the voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

221

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this action maybe noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active or ServiceBattery Charging System. If this message isdisplayed, it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as much as possible.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 264.

Inadvertent Power Battery SaverThis feature is designed to protect your vehicle’sbattery against drainage from the interiorlamps, trunk lamp, glove box lamp, or the garagedoor opener. When the ignition is turned off,the power to these features will automatically turnoff after 10 minutes (three minutes if a new carhas 15 miles (24 km) or less). Power will berestored for an additional 10 minutes if any door isopened, the trunk is opened or the courtesylamp switch is turned on.

222

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{CAUTION:

If the HUD image is too bright, or too highin your field of view, it may take you moretime to see things you need to see when itis dark outside. Be sure to keep the HUDimage dim and placed low in your fieldof view.

If equipped, the Head-Up Display (HUD) allowsyou to see some of the driver information thatappears on your instrument panel cluster on thewindshield.

The information may be displayed in English ormetric units and appears as an image focused outtoward the front of your vehicle. To changefrom English to metric units, see DIC Controls andDisplays on page 258.

The HUD consists of the following information:

• Speedometer

• Turn Signal Indicators

• High-Beam Indicator Symbol

• Driver Shift Control Transmission Feature,see Automatic Transmission Operation onpage 116

• Check Gages Icon

• Adaptive Cruise Control Features andIndicators (If Equipped), see Adaptive CruiseControl on page 197

• Forward Collision Alert Features andIndicators (If Equipped), see Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) System on page 184

• Radio Features

United States version shown, Canada similar

223

Be sure to continue scanning your displays,controls and driving environment just as you wouldin a vehicle without HUD. If you never look at yourinstrument panel cluster, you may not seesomething important, such as a warning light.Under important warning conditions, the CHECKGAGES message will display in the HUD. Viewyour Driver Information Center (DIC) for moreinformation.

The HUD controls arelocated to the left of thesteering wheel on theDIC control panel.

~ (Head-Up Display): Press this button tochange the position of the HUD on the windshield.Press the top part of the button to move theHUD image up. Press the bottom part of the buttonto move the HUD image down.

You can also adjust the brightness of the HUDimage. Press the knob on the center of theDIC control panel in until it pops out and then pullthe knob until is completely extended. Turn theknob clockwise or counter-clockwise to increase ordecrease the brightness. If you turn the knob allthe way to the left, the HUD image will turn off.

To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly,do the following:

1. Adjust the seat to a comfortable drivingposition. If you change your seat position later,you may have to re-adjust your HUD.

2. Start your engine and press the top or bottomof the HUD button to center the HUD image inyour view.The HUD image can only be adjusted up anddown, not side-to-side.

3. Turn the knob on the DIC control panel toadjust the brightness of the HUD image.

The brightness of the HUD image is determinedby the light conditions in the direction your vehicleis facing and where you have the HUD set.If you are facing a dark object or a heavily shadedarea, your HUD may anticipate that you areentering a dark area and may begin to dim.

224

To turn the HUD image off, turn the knobcounter-clockwise.Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD imageharder to see.As light shines out from the HUD, it is possible forlight to shine back in. In rare occurrences,when the sun is at a specific angle and position,the sun’s rays can shine back into the HUD. Whenthis occurs, the display device within the HUDwill be temporarily illuminated. The event will endwhen the vehicle’s angle to the sun changes.Clean the inside of the windshield as needed toremove any dirt or film that reduces the sharpnessor clarity of the HUD image.To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaneron a soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently,then dry it.Notice: When cleaning, be careful not toscratch the HUD or camera lenses. Donot spray glass cleaner directly on the HUDlens because the cleaner could leak inside theunit and cause damage.If the ignition is on and you cannot see the HUDimage, check to see if:• Something is covering the HUD unit.• The brightness is adjusted properly.

• The HUD image is adjusted to theproper height.

• Ambient light in the direction your vehicle isfacing is low.

• A fuse is blown. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 487.

Keep in mind that your windshield is part of theHUD system. See Windshield Replacementon page 419.

The following Adaptive Cruise Control messagemay appear in the HUD:

PEDAL APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE: Thismessage indicates that you are pressing yourfoot on the accelerator pedal and overridingAdaptive Cruise Control. While you are doingthis, the system will not automatically apply thebrakes. Once you remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal, Adaptive Cruise Control willreturn to normal operation and be able to applythe brakes, if needed.

You may also see an Adaptive Cruise Controlactive symbol, alert symbol or vehicle aheadsymbol. See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 197for more information.

225

Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA)The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)system is designed to help you park while thevehicle is in REVERSE (R). It operates only at verylow speeds, less than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPAcan help make parking easier and help you avoidcolliding with objects such as parked vehicles.The URPA system can detect objects up to5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell you howclose these objects are from your rear bumper.

{CAUTION:

The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)system does not replace driver vision.URPA does not:

• Operate above speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h).• Detect objects more than 5 feet

(1.5 meters) behind the vehicle.This distance may be less duringwarmer or humid weather.



• Detect objects that are below thebumper, underneath the vehicle, orthat are very close to the vehicle.

• Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

So if you do not use proper care beforebacking up, you could hit a vehicle, child,pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death. Eventhough the vehicle has the URPA system,always check carefully before backing upby checking behind your vehicle.

226

The URPA display islocated inside thevehicle, above therear window. It hasthree color-coded lightsthat can be seenthrough the rearviewmirror or by turningaround.

How the System WorksURPA comes on automatically when the shift leveris moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehiclespeed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Whenthe system turns on, the three lights on the displaywill illuminate for one and a half seconds to letyou know that the system is working. If yourvehicle is moving in REVERSE (R) at a speedgreater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the red light will flashto remind you that the system does not work ata speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speedof less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the followingwill occur:

Description English MetricAmber light 5 ft 1.5 m

Amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 mAmber/amber/red lights &

continuous chime 20 in 0.5 m

Amber/amber/red lightsflashing & continuous

chime1 ft 0.3 m

A chime will sound the first time an object isdetected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and5 feet (1.5 m) away.

URPA cannot detect objects that are above trunklevel. In order for the rear sensors to recognizean object, it must be within detection range behindthe vehicle.

227

When the System Does Not Seem to WorkProperlyThe light may flash red when the vehicle is inREVERSE (R), if the ultrasonic sensors are notkept clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumperfree of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush. Otherconditions that may affect system performanceinclude things like the vibrations from a jackhammeror the compression of air brakes on a very largetruck. If after cleaning the rear bumper and thendriving forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h), thedisplay continues to flash red, see your dealer.

If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or abicycle or an object was hanging out of your trunkduring your last drive cycle, the light may alsoflash red. The light will continue to flash wheneverin REVERSE (R) until your vehicle is drivenforward at least 15 mph (25 km/h) without anyobstructions behind the vehicle.

For cleaning instructions, see Washing YourVehicle on page 480.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Your vehicle is equipped with accessory poweroutlets. The outlets can be used to plug inelectrical equipment such as a cellular telephone,CB radio, etc.

Your vehicle has one outlet in front of the centerconsole, one in the center console lid andthere may be an additional outlet in the rear of thecenter console.

Your vehicle may have a small cap that must beremoved to access the accessory power outlet. If itdoes, when not using the outlet be sure to coverit with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment pluggedin for an extended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain the battery. Power isalways supplied to the outlets. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum 20 ampere rating.

228

Certain accessory power plugs may not becompatible to the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. Ifyou experience a problem, see your dealerfor additional information on the accessorypower outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before adding electricalequipment.

Follow the proper installation instructions that areincluded with any electrical equipment you install.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have an ashtray andcigarette lighter.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

AshtrayThe ashtray is located under the climate controlpanel on the center console. Press on the door torelease the ashtray. The ashtray will automaticallyslide open for use.

To empty the ashtray with the ashtray in full openposition, locate the release button to the rightof the ash receiver and slide it to the right (in thedirection of the arrow). The ash receiver willunlock and lift slightly and can then be easilyremoved from the housing. To replace theash receiver, place it into position in the ashtrayhousing and push down firmly until it locksinto place.

229

Cigarette Lighter

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperage rating of15 amperes.

The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray.The vehicle does not have any cigarette lightersfor the rear seat passengers.

To activate the cigarette lighter, push it into theheating element and let go. When the lighteris ready it will pop back out by itself.

Climate Controls

Dual Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle.

Automatic Operation

Vehicles With Heated and Ventilated Seats Shown,Vehicles Without Similar

230

AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressedand the temperature is set, the system willautomatically control the inside temperature, theair delivery mode, the air conditioning compressor,and the fan speed. AUTO will appear on thedisplay next to the fan, mode indicators,and recirculation indicator if your vehicle has a airquality sensor.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortablesetting, generally, between 70°F (21°C)and 80°F (27°C).Choosing the coldest or warmest temperaturesetting will not cause the system to heat orcool any faster. If the system is set atthe warmest temperature setting, the systemwill try to continuously heat the vehicleand will not adjust the system down as thevehicle warms up.

In cold weather, the system can start atreduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold airinto the vehicle until warmer air is available.The system starts out blowing air at the floor,but can automatically change modes asthe vehicle warms up to maintain the chosentemperature setting. The length of timeneeded for warm up depends on the outsidetemperature and the length of time thathas elapsed since the vehicle was last driven.

3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may takefrom 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust thetemperature, if necessary.

You can switch from English to metric unitsthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC). SeeDIC Controls and Displays on page 258.

The air-conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so some water might drip underneaththe vehicle while idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

231

Manual Operation

yN z (Mode): Pressing the mode switch andchanging the mode cancels automatic operationand allows the operator to manually select the airdelivery location. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation.

The outboard air outlets always receive airflowregardless of the mode selected. See OutletAdjustment on page 237 to change this airflowfrom the outboard outlets.To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of theair to the instrument panel outlets, and thendirects most of the remaining air to the flooroutlets. In automatic operation, cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets and warmer air to thefloor outlets.

[ (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to theoutboard outlets, and a little air directed tothe windshield and side windows.

The mode switch can also be used to select thedefog mode. Information on defogging anddefrosting can be found later in this section.

yAz (Fan): Press this switch to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Pressing this switchcancels automatic operation and allows theoperator to manually select the amount of airflow.Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.

If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is atthe highest setting, the passenger compartmentair filter may need to be replaced. For moreinformation, see Passenger Compartment Air Filteron page 239 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 505.

h (Recirculation): Press this button to controlthe air source for the climate control system. Ifin AUTO mode, press this button once toselect recirculation. This mode keeps outside airfrom coming in the vehicle and recirculates the airin the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outsideair and odors from entering the vehicle or tohelp cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly.

232

Recirculation is not available in the defrost modeand shuts off when defog mode is selected.Both of these features are designed to limit foggingin the vehicle. If recirculation is selected duringdefog mode, it automatically turns off after10 minutes to limit problems with fogging.

In some conditions, using recirculation for longperiods of time can cause the air inside the vehicleto become too dry or stuffy. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air in the vehicle hascooled, select AUTO to return to automatic climatecontrol operation or push the recirculation buttonagain to select outside air.

Press this button a second time to selectoutside air.

: (Outside Air): This mode forces the systemto pull air from outside the vehicle. It can beused to bring fresh air into the vehicle.

Air Quality Sensor: Your vehicle could have anair quality sensor to help limit the climatecontrol system from pulling in some harmful

exhaust fumes from older, poorly running, ordiesel-equipped vehicles that are driving near you.This sensor, when active, monitors the airquality in front of your vehicle and switches to airrecirculation when poor quality air is detectedoutside your vehicle. Press the AUTO button onthe climate control to activate the air qualitysensor. The word AUTO comes on the center ofthe climate control display. While the air qualitysensor senses poor quality air, the recirculationgraphic displays.

Under some conditions, the air quality sensorsystem does not operate. In cold weather, thesystem might not be active (even if AUTO isdisplayed) because of concerns of fogging yourwindows, which may occur by activatingrecirculation mode. Also, the air quality sensorsystem does not remain in recirculation mode forextended periods of time that could cause stuffy orvery dry conditions in the vehicle. Following apoorly running vehicle for an extended period oftime may not keep recirculation active indefinitely.

233

The air quality sensor does not activate due toorganic odors, like skunk, and may not activate onmany chemical-related odors. If you wish to limitthese types of odors, manually select recirculation.Your vehicle could also have a charcoal filter thatcan limit many odors from being pulled into yourvehicle. This filter, like your engines air cleanerfilter, needs to be changed periodically. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 505. The airquality sensor system does not protect againstcarbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see orsmell. See Engine Exhaust on page 125.

O (Power Driver’s Temperature): Press thepower button located on the driver’s side ofthe climate control panel to turn the entire climatecontrol system on or off. Turn the knob toincrease or decrease the temperature inside thevehicle.

O (Power Passenger’s Temperature): Pressthe power button located on the passenger’s sideof the climate control panel to turn the passenger’sclimate control system on if they wish to have a

different setting than the driver. Turn the knob toincrease or decrease the temperature for thefront passenger. Turning the passenger’sside power button off will not shut off the climatecontrol system for the passenger. The systemis set to the same setting as the driver.

{ (Ventilated Seat): Press this button, to turn onthe driver or passenger’s side ventilated seat, ifthe vehicle has this feature. See Heated andVentilated Seats on page 11.

J (Heated Seat): Press this button, to turn onthe driver or passenger’s side heated seatand seatback, if the vehicle has this feature. SeeHeated and Ventilated Seats on page 11.

^ (Air Conditioning): Press this button tomanually turn off the air conditioning compressor.Press AUTO to return to automatic operation orpress the A/C OFF button again. To limit fogging onthe windshield, the air conditioning compressorcannot be off while in the defrost mode.

234

Sensors

There is a solar sensor located on the instrumentpanel, near the windshield.

There is also an interior temperature sensorlocated next to the steering wheel on theinstrument panel.

These sensors monitor the solar radiation and theair inside the vehicle, then use the informationto adjust the temperature, the fan speed and theair delivery system, in order to maintain the

selected temperature. The system may alsosupply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facingthe sun. Do not cover the sensors or the automaticclimate control system will not work properly.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog from the windshield. Usethe defog mode to clear the windows of fog ormoisture and warm the passengers. Use thedefrost mode to remove fog or frost from thewindshield more quickly.

yN z (Mode): Press this button until defogappears on the display.

- (Defog): This mode directs the air betweenthe windshield and floor outlets with someair supplied to the outboard panel outlets and sidewindow defogging outlets. When this mode isselected, the system turns off recirculationand runs the air-conditioning compressor unlessthe outside temperature is at or below freezing.

235

The recirculation mode is cancelled when thesystem enters the defog mode. If recirculation isselected while in the defog mode, it is cancelledafter 10 minutes.

If there is fogging on the side windows, remain indefog or defrost mode until they clear.

0 (Defrost): Press this button to direct most ofthe air to the windshield, with some air directedto the side windows and outboard panel outlets. Inthis mode, the system automatically turns offrecirculation and runs the air-conditioningcompressor, unless the outside temperature is ator below freezing. Recirculation cannot beselected while in the defrost mode.

This mode can also cause the fan speed and airtemperature to increase.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

The rear window defogger only works when theignition is on or during remote start, ifprogrammed. See “Personal Settings Menu” underVehicle Personalization on page 148 for additionalinformation.

= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonto turn the rear window defogger on or off. Besure to clear as much snow from the rear windowas possible.

The rear window defogger turns off about10 minutes after the button is pressed. If thevehicle’s speed is above 30 mph (48 km/h), therear defogger stays on continuously. If turnedon again, the defogger only runs for aboutfive minutes before turning off. The defogger canalso be turned off by pressing the button againor by turning off the engine.

The heated outside rearview mirrors also heat tohelp clear fog or frost from the surface of themirror when the rear window defogger is on. SeeOutside Power Heated Mirrors on page 130.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

236

Outlet AdjustmentUse the lever located in the center of each outletto change the direction of the airflow, eitherside-to-side or up and down. Use the thumbwheelsto open or close the outlets to adjust the airflow.Turn the thumbwheel towards the centerconsole to open the outlets and allow themaximum amount of air to enter your vehicle. Turnthe thumbwheel towards the vehicle door toclose the outlets and minimize the amount of airentering the vehicle.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside of yourvehicle more effectively.

• If the airflow seems low when the fan speed isat the highest setting, the passengercompartment air filter may need to be replaced.For more information, see PassengerCompartment Air Filter on page 239.

Rear Climate Control System

Your vehicle has a rear climate control system.The base model includes air outlets in the rear ofthe center console for cooling and under-seatair outlets for heating. The temperature, quantity,and air delivery location is controlled automaticallyby the front climate control system.

Some vehicles are equipped with an optionalclimate control panel for the rear passenger,located on the back of the center console.

The left knob controls the temperature of the air tothe rear passengers. Turning the knob to theleft will make the air cooler. Turning the knob tothe right will make the air warmer.

237

The right knob controls the air delivery to the rearpassengers. Turning the knob all the way tothe left will shut off airflow to the rear passengers.Operating with the rear air delivery off maymake the entire vehicle warm or cool less quickly.It may also increase the air rush sound of thefront system.

9 (Off): This is the off position.

Y (Vent): This mode directs all the rearpassenger airflow to the outlets in the console.This is the normal position for cool downconditions.

\ (Bi-Level): This mode directs airflow to theconsole outlets and the floor.

[ (Floor): This mode directs all of the airflow tothe floor. This is the normal position for warmup conditions.

The amount of airflow to the rear passengers iscontrolled automatically by the front climate controlsystem, regardless of optional equipment.Airflow to the rear system will be turned off whendefrost is selected on the front climate controlpanel to direct air to clear the windshield.

Vehicles equipped with a rear climate controlpanel, also, have heated rear seats. There aretwo buttons, each with three indicator lights,located between the two climate control knobs onthe rear climate control panel, to control therear heated seats. See Heated Seats on page 14for additional information.

Be sure to keep the area under the front seatsclear of any objects so the air in your vehicle cancirculate effectively.

238

Passenger Compartment Air FilterYour vehicle may be equipped with a passengercompartment air filter. There are two types of filtersavailable. There is a standard dust filter thattraps small particles including pollen. There is,also, a dust/odor filter available that traps dust andpollen and also uses a charcoal element to helpreduce many offensive odors from enteringyour vehicle. Like your vehicle’s engine aircleaner/filter, it will need to be changedperiodically. For information on how often tochange the passenger compartment air filter, seeScheduled Maintenance on page 505.

Notice: Driving without a passengercompartment air filter in place can cause waterand small particles, like paper and leaves, tobe pulled into your climate control systemwhich may cause damage to it. Make sure youalways replace the old filter with a new one.

The access panel for the passenger compartmentair filter is located under the hood near thewindshield, on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 373for more information on location. See DoingYour Own Service Work on page 364 forinformation on doing your own service work.

239

To access the passenger compartment air filter,do the following:

1. Pull back the rubber hood seal from the edgeof the leaf screen vent cover.

2. Remove the three fasteners that hold the filteraccess cover in place and slide the cover off.

3. To access the filter, remove the black plasticwater deflector by lifting the outboard edge ofthe deflector to release the retention tab.

4. Lift the inboard edge of the deflector torelease the retention tab.

5. Lift and slide the water deflector toward theinboard side and remove it.

6. The top edge of the filter should be visible.Reach in and lift the filter out, pulling upwardand toward the front of the vehicle.

7. Insert the new air filter by sliding it back intoplace. Make sure the arrow on the filter ispointing toward the passenger compartment.

Reverse steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the waterdeflector, filter cover and the hood seal.

240

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to the warning lights and gages could alsosave you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Asyou will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let youknow when there is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on while you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and evendangerous. So please get to know your warninglights and gages. They are a big help.

Your vehicle also has a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) that works along with thewarning lights and gages. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 258 for more information.

241

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You willknow how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will needto know to drive safely and economically.

United States Base version shown, Canada and Uplevel similar

242

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometers perhour (km/h). See “MPH (km)” under DIC Controlsand Displays on page 258 for more information.The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Your vehicle’s odometer workstogether with the driver information center.You can set a Trip A and a Trip B odometer. See“Trip Information” under DIC Controls andDisplays on page 258 for more information.If your vehicle ever needs a new odometerinstalled, the new one will be set to the correctmileage total of the old odometer.

TachometerThis gage indicatesthe engine speedin revolutionsper minute (rpm).

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the ignition button is pressed to START, achime will be provided for several seconds toremind people to buckle their safety belts. Thedriver safety belt light will also be provided and stayon for several seconds, then it will flash for severalmore. You should buckle your seat belt.

This chime and light willbe repeated if the driverremains unbuckledand the vehicleis in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime northe light will be provided.

243

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the ignition button ispressed to START, a chime will sound for severalseconds to remind the front passenger tobuckle their safety belt. This would only occur ifthe passenger airbag is enabled. See PassengerSensing System on page 74 for more information.The passenger safety belt light will also comeon and stay on for several seconds, then itwill flash for several more.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light tells you if thereis an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensors, the airbag modules,the wiring and the diagnostic module. Formore information on the airbag system, see AirbagSystem on page 64.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

244

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

If there is a problem with the airbag system inyour vehicle, the SERVICE AIR BAG message willappear on the DIC display. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 264 for more information.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your overhead console has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

The indicator next to the passenger airbag statusindicator lights is the passenger safety beltreminder light. See Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light on page 244 for more informationon that indicator.

When the vehicle is running, the passenger airbagstatus indicator will light ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, for several seconds as asystem check. Then, after several more seconds,the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, oreither the on or off symbol, to let you know thestatus of the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.


245

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.


{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

246

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 74 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 244.

Charging System Light

When you turn theengine on, this lightwill come on brieflyto show that thegenerator and batterycharging systems areworking properly.

If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service.You should take your vehicle to the dealer at once.To save your battery until you get there, turn offall accessories. See DIC Controls and Displays onpage 258 for more information.

247

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part isn’t working, theother part can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe engine on. If it does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set yourparking brake. The light will stay on if your parkingbrake does not release fully. If it stays on afteryour parking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push, or the pedal maygo closer to the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towedfor service. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 355.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.


248

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

With the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS),this light will comeon when your engine isstarted and may stayon for several seconds.That is normal.

If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on,there may be a problem with the antilock portion ofthe brake system. If the brake system warninglight is not on, you still have brakes, but you do nothave antilock brakes. See Brake System WarningLight on page 248 for more information.

If the light stays on, press the ignition Acc. button.If the light comes on when you are driving, stopas soon as possible and turn the ignition off.Then start the engine again to reset the system.If the light still stays on, or comes on againwhile you are driving, your vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warning light is noton, you still have brakes, but you do not haveanti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system

warning light is also on, you do not have anti-lockbrakes and there is a problem with your regularbrakes. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 248 for more information.

The ABS warning light should come on brieflywhen you turn the ignition on. If the light does notcome on then, have it fixed so it will be readyto warn you if there is a problem.

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light will come onbriefly as you start theengine, for vehiclesequipped with theTire PressureMonitor System.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires are significantly underinflated.

249

A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message willaccompany the light. Stop and check your tires assoon as it is safe to do so. If underinflated,inflate to the proper pressure. See Tires for moreinformation. This light will flash for approximately60 seconds and then turn on solid if a problemis detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor system.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 433,Tires on page 421 and DIC Warnings andMessages on page 264 for more information.

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

If the TractionControl (TC) warninglight comes on andstays on, there may bea problem with thetraction control system.

The TC warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the engine on. If it does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

The light will also come on if you turn the tractioncontrol system off using the TC on/off buttonlocated on the console.

If the TC warning light stays on or comes on whileyou are driving, pull off the road as soon aspossible and stop carefully. Turn your engine offand then restart it. If the light still stays on orcomes back on again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. Have the traction controlsystem inspected as soon as possible. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 323 andStabiliTrak® System on page 326 for moreinformation.

Also see Competitive Driving Mode (STS-V) onpage 325 for more information.

250

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warninglight will come on whenthe engine is very hot.

This light will also come on briefly when thevehicle is started.

If the light does not go out or comes on and stayson while driving, there may be a problem withthe cooling system. Driving with engine coolanttemperature light on could cause your vehicleto overheat, see Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 395. See EngineOverheating on page 393 and DIC Warnings andMessages on page 264 for more information.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows theengine coolanttemperature.

It can be used to see when your engine haswarmed up and to make sure your cooling systemis operating properly. If the gage pointer movesinto the shaded area, the engine coolant is too hotand the engine coolant temperature warninglight will come on. See Engine Overheating onpage 393 for more information.

251

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, the emission controlsmight not work as well, your vehicle’s fueleconomy might not be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. This could leadto costly repairs that might not be covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and can causethis light to come on. Modifications to thesesystems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 363.

252

This light should come on briefly, as a check toshow you it is working, as you start the engine. Ifthe light does not come on, have it repaired.This light will also come on during a malfunction inone of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the engine off, wait atleast 10 seconds and restart the engine. If thelight remains on steady, see “If the Light IsOn Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps, and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou also may be able to correct the emissionsystem malfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 368.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

253

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your vehicle’s electrical system may be wet.The condition will usually be corrected whenthe electrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 365. Poor fuelquality will cause the engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

To perform a check engine light bulb check with thekeyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is inthe passenger compartment. See Ignition Positionson page 111. Press the bottom of the Acc. buttonon the instrument panel and hold the button downfor five seconds. The instrument panel, includingthe check engine light, will light up and the ignitionwill be on, but the engine will not start — if youpress the bottom of the Acc. button only briefly, lessthan five seconds, the accessory power mode willbe turned on, but not the ignition. After the bulbcheck, be sure to press and release the Acc. buttonagain to turn the ignition off and avoid draining thevehicle’s battery.

254

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines thatcritical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection.This can happen if you have recently replaced thebattery or if the battery has run down. Thediagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving.This may take several days of routine driving. If youhave done this and your vehicle still does not passthe inspection for lack of OBD system readiness,your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

If equipped, this lighttells you if there could bea problem with yourengine oil pressure.

This light will come on briefly when you start yourengine. That is a check to be sure the lightworks. If it does not come on, be sure to have itfixed so it will be there to warn you if somethinggoes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it meansthat oil is not flowing through your engine properly.You could be low on oil and you might havesome other system problem.

255

Security Light

For informationregarding this light,see Theft-DeterrentSystem on page 108.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 217 formore information.

Lights On Reminder

This light comes onwhenever the parkinglamps are on.

See Headlamps on Reminder on page 216 formore information.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set yourcruise control.

The light will go out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 193and Adaptive Cruise Control on page 197 formore information.

256

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhenever thehigh-beam headlampsare on.

See “Intellibeam™ Intelligent High-BeamHeadlamp Control System” under Headlamps onpage 211 and Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 183 for more information.

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage showsapproximately howmuch fuel is in the tank.It works only whenthe engine is on.

If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Lowmessage will appear on the DIC and a singlechime will sound. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 264 for more information.

Here are a few concerns some owners have hadabout the fuel gage. All of these situations arenormal and do not indicate that anything is wrongwith the fuel gage:

• At the gas station the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• The gage may change when you turn, stopquickly or accelerate quickly.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tankthan the gage indicated. For example, the gagemay have indicated that the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more or less than halfthe tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

257

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you thestatus of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DICis also used to display warning/status messages.All messages will appear in the DIC display locatedat the bottom of the instrument panel cluster, belowthe tachometer and speedometer. The DIC buttonsare located on the instrument panel, to the left ofthe steering wheel.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After ashort delay, the DIC will display the currentdriver and the information that was last displayedbefore the engine was turned off.

The top line of the DIC display shows the vehiclesystem information and the warning/statusmessages. The bottom line of the DIC displayshows either the odometer, the trip odometer A orthe trip odometer B information on the left side.Only one odometer can appear at a time. See “TripInformation” under DIC Controls and Displayson page 258 for information on changing thedisplay to show the odometer or trip odometerinformation. The bottom line of the DIC displayalso shows the outside temperature on theright side and the shift lever position indicator in

the center. See Automatic Transmission Operationon page 116 for more information on the shiftlever positions.

When the sport mode is active, an S will appearnext to the shift position indicator on the center ofthe DIC display. When the manual mode isactive, an M will appear on the DIC display. Whenthe normal mode is active, only the shift positionindicator will appear. While the Driver ShiftControl (DSC) feature is active, the DIC willchange to show the selected gear. See “DriverShift Control (DSC)” under Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 116 for more information.

If a problem is detected, a warning message willappear on the display. Be sure to take anymessage that appears on the display seriously andremember that clearing the message will only makethe message disappear, not correct the problem.

DIC Controls and DisplaysThe Driver Information Center (DIC) has differentmodes which can be accessed by pressingthe four DIC buttons located on the instrumentpanel, to the left of the steering wheel.

258

DIC Buttons (Base Level)

If your vehicle doesnot have a Head-UpDisplay (HUD),these are thebuttons for the DIC.

«4ª (Information): Press the top or bottom ofthis button to scroll through the available vehicleinformation displays which include digitalspeed display, if your vehicle has this feature, fuelrange, fuel economy, fuel used, average speed,timer, battery voltage, tire pressure, if your vehiclehas a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system, andengine oil life, if your vehicle has this feature.

If you have an STS-V, the DIC also has additionalvehicle information displays which include engineboost, engine oil temperature, oil pressure, andtransmission fluid temperature.

See “MPH (km)” later in this section for moreinformation on the digital speed display.

AB 3 00 (Trip Information): Press the top ofthis button to scroll through the odometer, tripodometer A and trip odometer B. Press and holdthe bottom of this button to reset each tripodometer back to zero.

4// (Reset): Press this button to reset certain DICfeatures and to acknowledge DIC warningmessages and clear them from the DIC display.

EM (English/Metric): Press this button to changethe display from English to metric.

259

DIC Buttons (Uplevel)

If your vehicle has aHUD, these are thebuttons for the DIC.

«4ª (Information): Press the top or bottom ofthis button to scroll through the available vehicleinformation displays which include digital speeddisplay, if your vehicle has this feature, fuel range,fuel economy, fuel used, average speed, timer,battery voltage, tire pressure, if your vehicle has aTire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system, engine oil life,if your vehicle has this feature, and display units.See “MPH (km)” later in this section for moreinformation on the digital speed display.

«~ª (Head-Up Display): Press this button tochange the position of the HUD on the windshield.Press the top part of the button to move theHUD image up. Press the bottom part of the buttonto move the HUD image down.

To adjust the brightness of the HUD image, seeHead-Up Display (HUD) on page 223.

For information on adjusting the instrument panelbrightness, see Instrument Panel Brightnesson page 220.

4// (Reset): Press this button to reset certain DICfeatures and to acknowledge DIC warningmessages and clear them from the DIC display.

3 (Trip Information): Press this buttonto scroll through the odometer, trip odometer Aand trip odometer B. To reset each trip odometer,either press the reset button or press and holdthe trip information button until the trip odometerdisplayed returns to zero.

260

Information Display Menu ItemsThe following display menu items can be displayedby pressing the information button.

MPH (km/h)If your vehicle has this display, it shows thevehicle’s speed digitally in either miles perhour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).

MILES RANGE (km RANGE)This display shows the approximate number ofremaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) youcan drive without refilling the fuel tank. Thisestimate is based on the current driving conditionsand will change if the driving conditions change.For example, if you are driving in traffic makingfrequent stops, the display may read one number,but if you enter the freeway, the number maychange even though you still have the sameamount of fuel in the fuel tank. This is becausedifferent driving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freeway drivingproduces better fuel economy than city driving.

Once the range drops below about 40 miles(64 km) remaining, the display will showLOW RANGE.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Lowmessage will be displayed. See “Fuel LevelLow” under DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 264 for more information.

MPG AVG (L/100 km AVG)This display shows the approximate averagemiles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km). This number is calculated basedon the number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded sincethe last time this display was reset. To resetMPG AVG, press the reset button. The displaywill return to zero.

MPG INST (L/100 km INST)This display shows the current fuel economy. Thisnumber reflects only the fuel economy that thevehicle has right now and will change frequently asdriving conditions change. Unlike average fueleconomy, this display cannot be reset.

GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED)This display shows the number of gallons (gal) orliters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of thisdisplay. To reset GAL FUEL USED, pressthe reset button. The display will return to zero.

261

AVG MPH (AVG km/h)This display shows the average speed of thevehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h). This average is calculated based onthe various vehicle speeds recorded since the lastreset of this display. To reset AVG MPH, press thereset button. The display will return to zero.

TIMER OFFThis display can be used like a stopwatch. You canrecord the time it takes to travel from one point toanother. To access the timer, press the informationbutton until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays. To turnon the timer, press the reset button until TIMER ONdisplays. The timer will then start. To turn off thetimer, press the reset button again until TIMER OFFdisplays. The timer will stop and display the endtiming value. To reset the timer, press and hold thereset button after the timer has been stopped. Thedisplay will return to zero.

BATTERY VOLTSThis display shows the current battery voltage.If the voltage is in the normal range, the value willdisplay. For example, the display may read13.2 BATTERY VOLTS. If the voltage is low, thedisplay will have LOW after it. If the voltage is high,

the display will have HIGH after it. Your vehicle’scharging system regulates voltage based onthe state of the battery. The battery voltage mayfluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.This is normal. See Charging System Light onpage 247 for more information.If there is a problem with the battery chargingsystem, the DIC may display a message. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 264 andElectric Power Management on page 221 formore information.

Tire PressureIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this display shows the air pressure ofeach road tire in either pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). If the tire pressureis normal, the value will display. If the tirepressure is low, LOW will appear on the displaywith the value. If the tire pressure is high,HIGH will appear on the display with the value.Press the information button to scroll through thefollowing displays:

LF TIRE: This display shows the air pressure inthe driver’s side front tire.

RF TIRE: This display shows the air pressure inthe passenger’s side front tire.

262

LR TIRE: This display shows the air pressure inthe driver’s side rear tire.

RR TIRE: This display shows the air pressure inthe passenger’s side rear tire.

If the tire pressure display shows dashes insteadof a value, there may be a problem with yourvehicle. If this consistently occurs, see your dealerfor service.

ENGINE OIL LIFEIf your vehicle has this display, it shows theestimated oil life remaining. If you see99% ENGINE OIL LIFE on the display, that meansthat 99% of the current oil life remains.

When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on thedisplay. Change the oil as soon as possible.In addition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additional maintenanceis recommended in the Maintenance Schedule inthis manual. See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 505 and Engine Oil on page 380.

After an oil change, reset the ENGINE OIL LIFEdisplay. To reset, see Engine Oil Life System onpage 383. The display will show 100% ENGINE OILLIFE after it has been reset. Also clear theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message from thedisplay.

ENGLISH DISPLAY UNITS(METRIC DISPLAY UNITS)This display allows you to select between Englishand metric units of measurement if your vehiclehas the uplevel DIC. Press the reset buttonto switch between English and metric units.

Blank LineThis display shows no information.

ENGINE BOOST (STS-V Only)This display shows a graphic that indicates theamount of boost the engine is receiving ineither pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa).

ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (STS-V Only)This display shows the engine oil temperaturein either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degreesCelsius (°C).

263

OIL PRESSURE (STS-V Only)This display shows the oil pressure in eitherpounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).

TRANS (Transmission) FLUID TEMP(Temperature) (STS-V Only)This display shows the transmission fluidtemperature in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) ordegrees Celsius (°C).

Trip Information Display Menu ItemsThe following display menu items can be displayedby pressing the trip Information button.

OdometerPress the trip information button until the odometerappears on the DIC display. The odometershows the total distance the vehicle has beendriven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).

Trip OdometerPress the trip information button until tripodometer A or B appears on the DIC display.The trip odometer shows the current distancetraveled since the last reset for each trip odometerin either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Bothodometers can be used at the same time.

For base level vehicles, each trip odometer can bereset to zero separately by pressing and holdingthe bottom of the trip information button whilethe desired trip odometer is displayed. For uplevelvehicles, reset each trip odometer by pressingthe reset button or by pressing and holding the tripinformation button while the desired trip odometeris displayed.

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages appear if there is a problemdetected in one of your vehicle’s systems. The textmessages are the same for both the base audioand Navigation systems unless otherwiseindicated.

You must acknowledge a message to clear it fromthe screen for further use. To clear a message,press the reset button.

Be sure to take any message that appears on thescreen seriously and remember that clearingthe message will only make the messagedisappear, not the problem.

264

AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFFThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned off. See Headlamps onpage 211 for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ONThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned on. See Headlamps onpage 211 for more information.

BATTERY NOT CHARGING SERVICECHARGING SYS (System)

This symbol appearswith this message.

This message displays when a problem with thecharging system has been detected. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the system detectsthat the battery voltage is dropping beyond areasonable level. The battery saver system startsreducing certain features of the vehicle thatyou may be able to notice. At the point that thefeatures are disabled, this message is displayed.It means that the vehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow thebattery to recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor battery voltageon the DIC by pressing the information buttonuntil you find BATTERY VOLTS.

265

BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH


This message displays when the electricalcharging system is overcharging the battery.When the system detects that the battery voltageis above an estimated 16 volts, this messagedisplays.

To reduce the charging overload, use the vehicle’saccessories. Turn on the exterior lamps andradio, set the climate control on AUTO and the fanspeed on the highest setting, and turn the rearwindow defogger on.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts when the engine is running.You can monitor battery voltage on the DICby pressing the information button until you findBATTERY VOLTS.

BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW


This message displays when the electrical systemis charging less than 10 volts or the battery hasbeen drained.

If this message appears immediately after startingthe engine, it is possible that the generator canstill recharge the battery. The battery shouldrecharge while driving, but may take a few hoursto do so. Consider using an auxiliary chargerto boost the battery after returning home or to afinal destination. Make sure you follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

If this message appears while driving or afterstarting your vehicle and stays on, have it checkedimmediately to determine the cause of this problem.

266

To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,you can reduce the load on the electrical systemby turning off the accessories.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor battery voltageon the DIC by pressing the information buttonuntil you find BATTERY VOLTS.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when service is requiredfor your vehicle. See your dealer. See EngineOil on page 380 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 505 for more information.

When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message by clearing it from the display,you still must reset the engine oil life systemseparately. For more information on resetting theengine oil life system, see Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 383.

CHECK BRAKE FLUIDThis message displays if the ignition is on toinform the driver that the brake fluid level is low.Have the brake system serviced by your dealer assoon as possible. See Brake System WarningLight on page 248 for more information.

CHECK GAS CAPThis message displays when the fuel cap has notbeen fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap toensure that it is on and tightened properly.

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this message displays when the tirepressure in one of the tires needs to be checked.See DIC Controls and Displays on page 258for more information on checking your vehicle’stire pressures. If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have thetire pressures checked and set to those shown onthe Tire Loading Information label. See TirePressure Monitor System on page 433 andInflation - Tire Pressure on page 431 for moreinformation. If the tire pressure is low, the low tirepressure warning light comes on. See Low TirePressure Warning Light on page 249.

267

CHECK WASHER FLUID


This message displays when your vehicle is lowon windshield washer fluid. Refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir as soon as possible.See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 404 formore information.

CLEAN RADARThis message displays when the Adaptive CruiseControl system is disabled because the radaris blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your path.It may also activate during heavy rain or due toroad spray. To clean the system, see “Cleaning theSystem” under Adaptive Cruise Control onpage 197.

COMPETITIVE DRIVING (STS-V Only)This message displays when the competitivedriving mode is turned on with the traction controlbutton. The TC (traction control) light comes onwhen the competitive driving mode is on. TheTraction Control System (TCS) will not operatewhile in competitive driving mode. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See Competitive Driving Mode(STS-V) on page 325 for more information.

DRIVER DOOR AJAR


This message displays if the driver’s door was notclosed completely. Make sure that the driver’sdoor is closed completely.

268

ENGINE COOLANT HOT IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC,stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do notincrease the engine speed above normal idlingspeed. See Engine Overheating on page 393for more information.


This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light on page 251.

See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 395 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

ENGINE HOT –AC (Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 251. To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioning compressor isautomatically turned off. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You can continue todrive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear, have thesystem repaired by your dealer as soon aspossible to avoid damage to the engine.

269

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating on page 393 for moreinformation.

This message displays when the engine hasoverheated. Immediately look for a safe place topull your vehicle over and turn the engine off rightaway to avoid severe engine damage. See EngineOverheating on page 393 and Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode on page 395. A chimealso sounds when this message is displayed.

ENGINE POWER REDUCEDThis message displays to inform you that theengine power is being reduced to protectthe engine from damage. There could be severalmalfunctions that might cause this message.Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’sability to accelerate. If this message is on,

but there is no reduction in performance, proceedto your destination. The performance may bereduced the next time the vehicle is driven.The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speedwhile this message is on, but accelerationand speed may be reduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should be taken to yourdealer for service as soon as possible.

ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCEDRPM’S (Revolutions Per Minute)This message displays when your vehicle is in anoverheated engine operating mode. If thismessage appears, the vehicle has determined thatcontinued operation at the existing engine speedmay lead to engine overheating. The vehicleautomatically limits engine RPMs to prevent engineoverheating. You may notice the vehicle upshiftingearly or reduced speeds while this message isdisplayed. When the engine oil returns to asafe operating temperature, this message clearsfrom the DIC and the vehicle returns to normaloperation. Your vehicle does not require servicewhen this message is displayed.

270

FUEL LEVEL LOW


This message displays when your vehicle is lowon fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.A single chime sounds when this message isdisplayed.

HOOD AJAR


This message displays if the hood was not closedcompletely. Make sure that the hood is closedcompletely.

ICE POSSIBLEThis message displays when the outsidetemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

KEY FOB BATTERY LOWThis message displays when the battery in thekeyless access transmitter is low. Replacethe battery in the transmitter. See “BatteryReplacement” under Keyless Access SystemOperation on page 88.

LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR


This message displays if the driver’s side reardoor was not closed completely. Make sure thatthe door is closed completely.

271

NO FOBS DETECTEDThis message displays if the vehicle does notdetect the presence of a keyless accesstransmitter when you have attempted to start thevehicle or a vehicle door has just closed. Thefollowing conditions may cause this messageto appear:

• Driver-added equipment plugged into theaccessory power outlet on the center consoleis causing interference. Examples of thesedevices are cell phones and cell phonechargers, two-way radios, power inverters, orsimilar items. Try moving the keylessaccess transmitter away from these deviceswhen starting the vehicle. In addition,PDA devices and remote garage and gateopeners may also generate ElectromagneticInterference (EMI) that may interfere withthe keyless access transmitter. Do not carrythe keyless access transmitter in the samepocket or bag as these devices.

• The vehicle is experiencing ElectromagneticInterference (EMI). Some locations, such asairports, automatic toll booths, and somegas stations, have EMI fields which mayinterfere with the keyless access transmitter.

If moving the transmitterto different locationswithin the vehicle doesnot help, place thetransmitter in the centerconsole transmitterpocket with the buttonsfacing forward andthen press theSTART button.

• The vehicle’s battery voltage is low. Thebattery voltage must be above 10 volts forthe keyless access transmitter to bedetected properly.

272

NO FOB OFF OR RUN?This message displays when the keyless accesstransmitter is not detected inside the vehiclewhile you are trying to turn the ignition off. Yourvehicle may be near a strong radio antenna signalcausing the keyless access system to be jammed.The vehicle remains in Acc. until OFF or STARThas been pressed or 10 minutes has expired.If you turn the ignition off and you cannot find thekeyless access transmitter, you will not beable to restart the vehicle. The keyless accesstransmitter needs to be inside of the vehiclein order for the vehicle to start. See Starting theEngine on page 113 for more information.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINENotice: If you drive your vehicle whilethe engine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil on page 380 for more information.

This message displays when the vehicle’sengine oil pressure is low.

A multiple chime sounds when this message isdisplayed. See Engine Oil on page 380 formore information.

Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damagecan result from driving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealeras soon as possible when this message isdisplayed.

PASSENGER DOOR AJAR


This message displays if the passenger’s sidefront door was not closed completely. Make surethat the door is closed completely.

273

PRESS START AND BRAKE TOSTART ENGINEThis message displays when you need to pressdown on the brake pedal while pressing thestart button on the electronic keyless ignition whentrying to start your vehicle. See Starting theEngine on page 113 for more information.

RADAR CRUISE NOT READYThis message displays when the Adaptive CruiseControl system will not activate due to atemporary condition. Your vehicle does not requireservice. This message also displays wheneither of the following conditions occur:

• The driver turns off the head-up display (HUD)while the Adaptive Cruise Control is engaged.

• The driver attempts to engage the AdaptiveCruise Control while the HUD is off.

If this message appears when you attempt toactivate the system, continue driving for severalminutes and then try activating the system again.

RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR


This message displays if the passenger’s side reardoor was not closed completely. Make sure thatthe door is closed completely.

SERVICE AC (Air Conditioning)SYSTEMThis message displays when the electronic sensorsthat control the air conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working. Have the climatecontrol system serviced by your dealer if you noticea drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency.

274

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problemwith the airbag system. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer immediately. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 244 for more information.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSISTThis message displays when a problem with thepanic brake assist system has been detected.Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.

SERVICE RADAR CRUISEThis message displays when the Adaptive CruiseControl system is disabled and needs service.See your dealer.

SERVICE STABILITY SYS (System)Your vehicle may have a vehicle stabilityenhancement system called StabiliTrak®.

This message displays if there has been a problemdetected with the StabiliTrak® System.

If this message comes on while you are driving,pull off the road as soon as possible and stopcarefully. Try resetting the system by turning theignition off then back on. If this message still stayson or comes back on again while you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. Have theStabiliTrak® System inspected by your dealer assoon as possible. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 326 for more information.

SERVICE STEERING SYS (System)Your vehicle may have a speed variable assiststeering system.

This message displays if a problem is detectedwith the speed variable assist steering system.When this message is displayed, you may noticethat the effort required to steer the vehicleincreases or feels heavier, but you will still be ableto steer the vehicle. See Steering on page 327for more information.

SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)This message displays when the suspensionsystem is not operating properly. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.

275

SERVICE TIRE MONITORIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this message displays if a part on thesystem is not working properly. If you drive yourvehicle while any of the four sensors aremissing or inoperable, the warning comes on inabout 20 minutes. A sensor would be missing, forexample, if you put different wheels on yourvehicle without transferring the sensors. If thewarning comes on and stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPM. See your dealer.

SERVICE THEFT SYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the hood open and closed switches. Theswitches may need to be replaced. Whenthis message is displayed, the theft-deterrentsystem will still be protecting the interior ofthe vehicle, however, the hood area will not beprotected at this time. Also, the remote startfunction will not work when this message appears.See your dealer for service.

SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when there is a problemwith the transmission of your vehicle. Haveyour vehicle serviced by your dealer.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays when a non-emissionsrelated malfunction occurs. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

SPEED LIMITED TO XXXThis message displays when your vehicle speed islimited to XXX, mph in English mode and km/hin Metric mode, because the vehicle detectsa problem in the suspension system. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.

STABILITY SYS (System) ACTIVEThis message displays any time the StabiliTrak®

System is actively assisting you with directionalcontrol of the vehicle. Slippery road conditions mayexist when this message is displayed, so adjustyour driving accordingly. This message maystay on for a few seconds after StabiliTrak® stopsassisting you with directional control of thevehicle. See StabiliTrak® System on page 326 formore information.

276

STABILITY SYS (System) NOT READYThis message displays if the StabiliTrak®

System is not ready. Two conditions may causethis message to display:

• The vehicle needs to be driven in a straightline until the sensors are centered. Oncethe sensors are centered, the StabiliTrak®

System will be ready and the STABILITY SYSREADY message will display.

• The system needs to warm up. This mayoccur when you first start your vehicleand drive away during cold winter weather.This is normal. You can acknowledgethis message by pressing the reset button.

The StabiliTrak® performance is affected until theSTABILITY SYS READY message is displayedin the DIC. See StabiliTrak® System on page 326for more information.

STABILITY SYS (System) OFFThis message displays any time you turn offStabiliTrak® using the TC (traction control) on/offbutton. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 323 for more information. When thismessage has been displayed, StabiliTrak® is no

longer available to assist you with directionalcontrol of the vehicle. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 326 for more information.

STABILITY SYS (System) READYThis message displays any time you turn back onStabiliTrak® using the TC (traction control)on/off button. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 323 for more information. When thismessage has been displayed, StabiliTrak® is readyto assist you with directional control of thevehicle if needed. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 326 for more information.

STARTING DISABLED THEFTPROBLEMThis message displays when incorrect conditionsexist within the theft-deterrent system. Seeyour dealer for service.

STARTING DISABLED THROTTLEPROBLEMThis message displays when your vehicle’s throttlesystem is not functioning properly. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.

277

THEFT ATTEMPTED


This message displays if the theft-deterrentsystem has detected a break-in attempt while youwere away from your vehicle.

TRACTION ACTIVEThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is actively limiting wheel spin.Slippery road conditions may exist if this messageis displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.The message stays on for a few seconds after theTCS stops limiting wheel spin. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 323 for moreinformation.

TRANS (Transmission) HOTIDLE ENGINEThis message displays when the transmission fluidin your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle andallow it to idle until the transmission cools down oruntil this message is removed.

TRUNK OPEN


This message displays if the trunk was not closedcompletely. Make sure that the trunk is closedcompletely.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays as a reminder to turn offthe turn signal if you drive your vehicle formore than about 1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signalon. A multiple chime sounds when this messageis displayed.

278

Other MessagesHere are more messages that you can receive onyour Driver Information Center (DIC). Toacknowledge a message and read anothermessage that may have come on at the sametime, press the reset button.

• ACCESSORY ACTIVE

See Ignition Positions on page 111.

• KNOWN FOB

See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”under Keyless Access System Operationon page 88.

• MAX # FOBS LEARNED


• OFF/ACC (Accessory) TO LEARN


• READY FOR FOB X


• SHIFT TO PARK

See Starting the Engine on page 113 andShifting Into Park (P) on page 122.

• WAIT XX MIN (Minutes)


279

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 316. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which you canhelp avoid distraction while driving.While your vehicle is parked:• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.• Familiarize yourself with its operation.• Set up your audio system by presetting your

favorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

280

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment can interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems can interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 112 for moreinformation.

Setting the Time1. Press the tune/select knob (the right knob) to

enter the main menu.

2. Turn the tune/select knob until SET CLOCKdisplays.

3. Press the tune/select knob to selectSET CLOCK.

4. Turn the tune/select knob to adjust the time.

5. Press the tune/select knob to update the time.VEHICLE TIME UPDATED displays.

If the CLOCK/RADIO DISP is configured intoone of the configurable keys, pressing thekey switches the display back to the clock setfunction. The time and date always appears on theradio display. See “Configurable Radio DisplayKeys” under Radio with CD on page 282 for moreinformation on configuring the keys.

281

Setting the Date1. Press the tune/select knob (the right knob) to

enter the main menu.

2. Turn the tune/select knob until SET DATEdisplays.

3. Press the tune/select knob to selectSET DATE.

4. Turn the tune/select knob to adjust the date.

5. Press the tune/select knob to update thetime. VEHICLE DATE UPDATED displays.

If the DATE is configured into one of theconfigurable keys, pressing the key switches thedisplay back to the date set function. The timeand date always appears on the radio display.See “Configurable Radio Display Keys” underRadio with CD on page 282 for more informationon configuring the keys.

Radio with CD

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD similar

282

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases, aradio station can broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations can also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For more

information, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

4 (Information): Press this button while in XM™mode to display additional text informationrelated to the current song or channel: Artist, SongTitle, Category or PTY. To view this information,perform the following:

1. Press the tune/select knob to enter themain menu.

2. Turn the tune/select knob until INFO displays.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select INFO.The display changes to show the additionalXM™ information.

4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit thedisplay. To return to the original display,repeatedly press the BACK (F6) button or waitfor the display to time out.

283

Playing the Radio

O (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon and off.

n (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decreasethe volume.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to select asource, either radio or CD. The CD must be loadedto select the source and to play. CD displays ifa CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded, the displaydoes not change from the radio source.

Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to select FM1, FM2, AM,or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).

w (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

©¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow button togo to the previous station and stay there. Press theright single arrow button to go to the next stationand stay there. The sound mutes while seeking.

The radio seeks stations only with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

©¨ (Scan): Press the double arrow scan buttonto enter scan mode. SCAN displays. Press thisbutton to scan to the next station. The radio goes toa station, plays for five seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press this button again to stopscanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold the doublearrow scan button for more than two seconds until abeep sounds and PSCAN displays. The radio goesto the first preset station, plays for five seconds,then goes to the next preset station. Press thisbutton again to stop scanning presets.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

A LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: With this featurethe radio can be set to search for local stationsor stations that are further away for a largerselection.

To set this feature to LOCAL or DISTANT,perform the following steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until SEEK LOCALor SEEK DISTANT displays.

284

3. Press the tune/select knob to select eitherLOCAL or DISTANT.


To search for stations, press the single arrowbuttons. If the system is set to LOCAL, SEEKdisplays and seeks to stations only with strongsignals. If the system is set to DISTANT, D-SEEKdisplays and seeks to stations with weak andstrong signals.

This feature does not function with the XM™ radiostations.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, orXM1 or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for two seconds until a beepsounds. The set preset station numberdisplays above the set pushbutton. Wheneverthat numbered pushbutton is pressed forless than two seconds, the station that wasset, returns.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.To set the preset stations with an equalizationsetting, DSP setting, or a PTY (program type)setting, see each of these features later in thissection. When a preset station is selected,once one of these additional settings isselected, the preset station remembers eachsetting and it remains active, until the setting isselected off for that preset station.

AUTOSTORE PRESETS: To set the presetstations automatically, perform the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.


4. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTOSTOREPRESETS displays.

285

5. Press the tune/select knob to select.AUTOSTORE displays. The radioautomatically searches the band and selectsand stores the six radio stations with thestrongest signal. The stations are stored bysignal strength, not sequential order. Theset preset station number displays above theset pushbutton. Whenever that numberedpushbutton is pressed for less thantwo seconds, the station that wasset returns.


This feature does not function with the XM™radio stations.

The radio presets do not have to be reset whenthe vehicle is started, or when the battery poweris removed.

PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature storestwo different kinds of station presets. HOMEcan be used for local stations and AWAY forstations outside of the local broadcasting area.To set preset stations for home and away performthe following steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until PRESETSHOME/AWAY displays.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select.HOME or AWAY displays.


This feature does not function with the XM™ radiostations.

Follow the manual or automatic steps previouslylisted for setting the preset pushbuttons forboth home and away.

286

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble, performthe following steps:


2. Press the tune/select knob to scroll throughthe settings.

3. Turn the tune/select knob to increase or todecrease the bass, midrange, or treble. If astation is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.

4. Press the tune/select knob to set theadjustment.

5. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit thedisplay. To return to the original displayrepeatedly press the BACK (F6) button or waitfor the display to time out.

AUDIO EQUALIZER: This feature lets you selectcustomized equalization settings. To choose anequalization setting (EQ0 through EQ5), performthe following steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until EQUALIZERdisplays.

3. Press the tune/select knob to set theequalization setting. The equalizationsetting displays.


The equalization settings are preset toEQ0 (Normal), EQ1 (Pop), EQ2 (Rock),EQ3 (Jazz), EQ4 (Talk), and EQ5 (Country).

287

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)To adjust the balance or fade, perform thefollowing steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob untilBASS-MID-TREBLE displays.

3. Press the tune/select knob to enter the tonesettings.

4. Press the tune/select knob to scroll toBALANCE or FADER.

5. Turn the tune/select knob to adjust theBALANCE to the right or the left speakers andthe FADER to the front or the rear speakers.

6. Press the tune/select knob to set theadjustment.


EQ0 does not appear on the display while inthis mode.

RDS Messages

ALERT: Alert warns of local and nationalemergencies. When, an alert announcement comeson the current radio station or a related networkstation, ALERT displays. You will hear theannouncement, even if the volume is low or a CD isplaying. If a CD is playing, play stops during theannouncement. Alert announcements cannot beturned off. If the radio tunes to a related networkstation for the announcement, it returns to theoriginal station when the announcement is finished.

ALERT is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.

MSG (Message): If the current RDS station has amessage, MSG displays. The message candisplay the artist, song title, call in phone numbers,etc. If the entire message does not display,parts of the message displays every three secondsuntil the message is complete. Once thecompleted message has displayed, MSGdisappears from the display until another newmessage is received.

288

To display the last message, perform thefollowing steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until RECALL RDSMESSAGE displays.

3. Press the tune/select knob and the messagedisplays.

Once the message displays, MSG disappearsfrom the display until another new messageis received.

TP (Traffic Program): TP displays when theradio detects a signal from an RDS station that hastraffic announcement broadcast capability.

TA (Traffic Announcement): If TA displays, thetuned radio station broadcasts trafficannouncements, and when a traffic announcementcomes on the tuned station, you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, when TA is turned on it seeks to astation that does. When a station that broadcaststraffic announcements is found, the radio stopsseeking and TA displays. If no station is found thatbroadcasts traffic announcements, No Trafficdisplays.

The radio plays traffic announcements if the volumeis low. The radio interrupts the play of a CD if thelast tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements.

To turn TA on or off, perform the following steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until TRAFFICANNOUNCE displays.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select ON orOFF. An X appears in the box when ON isselected.


289

Activating Program Type (PTY)Stations (RDS and XM™)PTY lets you search for stations with specifictypes of music. The selectable PTYs are POP,EASY, TALK, CNTRY (Country), CLASS(Classical), and JAZZ.

To activate program types, perform thefollowing steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until PROGRAMTYPE MODE displays.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select ON orOFF. An X appears in the box when ON isselected.


Once program type is activated the PTYs displayabove the pushbuttons, in place of the presetstations (if programmed). Press the pushbutton forthe desired PTY. Not all stations support PTYs.The radio might not go to all of the stations with thatmusic type when pressing the pushbutton.

AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencylets the radio switch to a stronger station withthe same program type.

To turn AF on or off, perform the following steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until ALTERNATEFREQ. displays.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select AF OFF,AF ON, or AF REG. An X appears in the boxwhen ON is selected.


This feature does not function with the XM™radio stations.

290

Radio Message

THEFTLOCK: This message is displayed whenthe THEFTLOCK® system has been activated.Take the vehicle to the dealer for service.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 303 later in thissection for further detail.

Using the Single CD PlayerInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in. If the ignition and theradio are on, the CD begins playing. A CD can beloaded with the radio off, but it does not startplaying until the radio is on.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. While the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

When the CD is inserted, CD displays. As eachnew track starts to play, the track number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch(8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in thesame manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 313 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

291

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, use onlyCDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

When a CD is inserted, the CD functions displayabove the pushbuttons, in place of the presetstations (if programmed).

F1 { (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to go tothe previous track. Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. Release thepushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed timeof the track displays.

F2 | (Forward): Press this pushbutton to go tothe next track. Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within a track. Releasethe pushbutton to play the passage. The elapsedtime of the track displays.

F3 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton tolisten to the tracks in random, rather thansequential, order. RANDOM displays. Press RDMagain to turn off random play. RANDOMdisappears from the display.

F4 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to heara track over again. REPEAT displays. PressRPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEATdisappears from the display.

F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton todisplay the time of the track. Press this pushbuttonagain to remove the time of the track fromthe display.

© ¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow button togo to the previous or press the right singlearrow button to go to the next track on the CD.

292

©¨ (Scan): Press the double arrow button tolisten to each track for 10 seconds. The CD goesto a track, plays for 10 seconds, then goes tothe next track. Press this button again to stopscanning.


Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD whenit is playing or to eject a CD when it is notplaying. Eject can be activated with the ignitionand the radio off.

Using the Six-Disc CD ChangerThe CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,

difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If these problems occur,check the bottom surface of the CD. If the surfaceof the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly.If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care ofYour CDs on page 313 for more information.





293

When a CD is inserted, the CD functions displayabove the pushbuttons, in place of the presetstations (if programmed).

M (Load): Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.

2. Press and release the load button. PleaseWait displays.

3. Load the CD, when INSERT displays, insert aCD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls the CD in.

When a CD is inserted, CD displays and thenumber of the CD and the track number displays ifthe radio is on.

If the radio is on, the CD begins to playautomatically.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.

2. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. Please Wait displays anda beep sounds.

3. Load the CD, when INSERT displays, insert aCD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls the CD in.Do not load a CD until INSERT displays.The CD player takes up to six CDs. If youwant to load less than six CDs, load thedesired amount. The CD player times outwhen it does not receive any more CDs andthe last CD loaded begins to play.

If the radio is on, the last CD loaded begins toplay automatically.

F1 DISCn (Down): Press this pushbutton to goto the previous CD.

F2 DISCm (Up): Press this pushbutton to go tothe next CD.

F3 CD REV { (Reverse): Press this pushbuttonto go to the previous track. Press and hold thispushbutton to reverse quickly within the track.Release this pushbutton to play the passage.The elapsed time of the track displays.

F4 CD FWD | (Forward): Press this pushbuttonto go to the next track. Press and hold thispushbutton to advance quickly within the track.Release this pushbutton to play the passage.The elapsed time of the track displays.

294

F5 MODE: Press this pushbutton to select fromNORMAL, RPT TRCK (Repeat Track), RPTDISC (Repeat CD), RDM TRCK (Random Track),and RDM ALL (Random All CDs).• NORMAL: Sets the system for normal play of

the CD(s). NORMAL does not display while inthis mode.

• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the trackover again. RPT TRCK displays. Press theMODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.RPT TRCK disappears from the display.

• RPT DISC (Repeat CD): Repeats the CD overagain. RPT DISC displays. Press the MODEpushbutton again to turn off repeat play.RPT DISC disappears from the display.

• RDM TRCK (Random Track): Plays the trackson the current CD in random, rather thansequential, order. RDM TRCK appears on thedisplay. Press the MODE pushbutton again toturn off random play. RDM TRCK disappearsfrom the display.

• RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of theCDs loaded in random, rather than sequential,order. RDM ALL displays. Press the MODEpushbutton again to turn off random play. RDMALL disappears from the display.

F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton todisplay the time of the track. Press this pushbuttonagain to display CD PLAY MODE.

© ¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow button togo to the previous or press the right singlearrow button to go to the next track on the CD.

©¨ (Scan): Press this double arrow buttonto listen to each track for 10 seconds. The CDgoes to a track, play for 10 seconds, then go on tothe next track. Press this button again to stopscanning.


Z (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD thatis currently playing, or press and hold thisbutton to eject all of the CDs loaded. A beepsounds. Eject can be activated with the ignition orradio off.

295

Playing an MP3 CD-R DiscThe vehicle’s radio system could have the MP3feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playingan MP3 CD-R disc. For more information on howto play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3on page 297 later in this section.

CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:• If it is very hot. When the temperature returns

to normal, the CD should play.• If you are driving on a very rough road.

When the road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• The format of the CD might not be compatible.See Using an MP3 on page 297 later in thissection.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

Configurable Radio Display KeysThe four keys, located on each side of the radiodisplay, can be configured to make it easierto adjust the radio features and other non-radiorelated features can also be customized.

To program the configurable radio display keys,perform the following steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob untilSETUP displays.

3. Press the tune/select knob to enter intoSETUP.

4. Turn the tune/select knob until CONFIGUREDISPLAY KEYS displays.

296

5. Press the tune/select knob to enter intoCONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS.

6. Turn the tune/select knob to select which ofthe four configurable keys you would like tochange. The currently assigned featuredisplays.

7. Press the tune/select knob to select theconfigurable key to change.

8. Turn the tune/select knob to find the featurethat will be stored to the key.

9. Press the tune/select knob when you havefound the feature to be stored. The displayupdates, by showing the symbol of the featureselected next to the configurable key.

10. Repeat the previous steps for eachconfigurable key.

Once a feature is programmed to a key, thefeature does not display when programming theremaining configurable keys. The configurablekeys can be changed at any time.

Using an MP3MP3 CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension, other file extensions might not work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum are available for display by the radiowhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning anMP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usuallybetter to burn the disc all at once.

297

The player is able to read and play a maximumof 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and255 files. Long file names, folder names, or playlistnames might use more disc memory space thannecessary. To conserve space on the disc,minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlistnames. You can also play an MP3 CD thatwas recorded using no file folders. The systemcan support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keepthe depth of the folders to a minimum in orderto keep down the complexity and confusionin trying to locate a particular folder duringplayback. If a CD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are ignored.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, thedirectory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All filescontained directly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder is not displayed.

No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions do not function on aCD that was recorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of the folder theradio displays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) firstand then go to the root folder. When the radiodisplays the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

298

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists, thenplay begins from the first track under the rootdirectory. When all tracks from the rootdirectory have played, play continues fromfiles according to their numerical listing. Afterplaying the last track from the last folder,play begins again at the first track of the firstfolder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name.The new track name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that is displayed is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the songname is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radiodisplays the file name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or4 pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in, and LOADING CD appearson the display. The CD should begin playingand the CD symbol appears on the display. If theignition and the radio are on, the CD beginsplaying. A CD can be loaded with the radio off,but it does not start playing until the radio is on.

If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD isin the player, it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

299

As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 313 for more information.





F1r (Previous Folder): Press this pushbuttonto go to the first track in the previous folder.

Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quicklywithin a track. Release this pushbutton to playthe passage. REV and the elapsed time ofthe track displays.

Pressing this button while in folder random modegoes to the previous folder and plays the tracksin that folder in random order.

300

F2[ (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to goto the first track in the next folder.

Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quicklywithin a track. Release this pushbutton to playthe passage. FWD and the elapsed time ofthe track displays.

Pressing this button while in folder random modetakes you to the next folder and plays thetracks in that folder in random order.

F3 RDM (Random): To play the tracks on the CDin random, rather than sequential order, pressand release this pushbutton until RDM TRCKdisplays. Once all of the tracks in the current folderor playlist have played, the system moves on tothe next folder or playlist and plays all of the tracksin random order.

To play the tracks in the current folder in random,rather than sequential order, press and releasethis pushbutton until RDM FLDR displays.This feature does not work with playlists.

While in random, pressing and releasing eithersingle seek arrow goes to the next or previousrandom track.

Press and release this pushbutton until NORMALdisplays to turn off random play.

F4 RPT (Repeat): To repeat the current track,press and release this pushbutton until RPTTRCK displays.

To repeat the tracks in the current folder,press and release this pushbutton until RPTFLDR displays.

Press and release this pushbutton until NORMALdisplays to turn off repeated play.

F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton toswitch between the elapsed time of the track andthe MP3 playback information.

© ¨ (Seek): Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the previous track. Press the right arrow togo to the start of the next track. Pressing eitherarrow for more than two seconds searchesthe previous or next tracks at two tracks persecond. Release the button to stop searching andto play the track.

301

©¨ (Scan): Press the double arrow button toscan the tracks in each folder. The radio goes tothe next track, plays for 10 seconds, then goesto the next track. Press this button again tostop scanning.

w (Tune): Turning the tune knob will fast trackreverse or advance through the tracks in allfolders or playlists. The track number and filename displays for each track. Turning this knobwhile in random fast tracks reverse or advancesthe tracks in sequential order.

4 (Information): Press this button, while an MP3CD is loaded, to view the Title, Artist, Album,or Folder names. To view this information, performthe following:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until INFO displays.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select INFO.The display changes to show the additionalMP3 information.

4. Press one of the following pushbuttons toview that specific information.

• F1 TTLE (Title): To display the title name.

• F2 ATST (Artist): To display theartist name.

• F3 ALBM (Album): To display thealbum name.

• F4 FLDR (Folder): To display thefolder name.



Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD whenit is playing or to eject a CD when it is notplaying. Eject can be activated with the ignitionand the radio off.

302

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and noaction is required. This process should take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and textdata. No action is needed. This message should disappearshortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unavail Channel nolonger available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets,choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

303

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No Title Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No CAT Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

XM Theftlocked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having your vehicle serviced,check with your dealer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the XM™Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to activatethe service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

304

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle could have a navigation radiosystem.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.

Radio Personalization

Accessing the Radio’s Main Menu(Base Audio System)There are two different procedures for accessingthe radio’s main menu depending upon whetheror not your vehicle has the Navigation system.

To access the main menu of the radio, do one ofthe following:

• Using the Base audio system, press theCNFG button located on the radio or press thetune/select knob located on the right side ofthe radio. Then turn the tune/select knobclockwise or counterclockwise to scroll throughthe menu items.

• If your vehicle has the Navigation system, seethe Navigation System manual supplied withyour vehicle for more information on accessingthe main menu and for descriptions of themenu items for the Navigation system.

305

The main menu for the Base audio systemconsists of the following menu items:

• e BASS - MID - TREBLE

• x BALANCE - FADER

• e EQ EQUALIZER

• H/A (HOME/AWAY) PRESETS

• AUTOSTORE PRESETS

• CAT CATEGORY

• TA TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE

• RECALL RDS (Radio Data System)MESSAGE

• AF ALTERNATE FREQ. (Frequency)

• A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT

• 8 SET CLOCK

• B SET DATE

• 4 INFO (Information)

• LANG LANGUAGE

• SETUP

Radio Main Menu Item Descriptions(Base Audio System)The following descriptions are for the Base audiosystem. For information pertaining to theNavigation audio system, see “Audio System” inthe Index of the Navigation System manualsupplied with your vehicle.

e BASS - MID (Midrange) - TREBLE: Thismenu item lets you adjust the levels for the bass,midrange and treble features of the audiosystem. See “Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)”under Radio with CD on page 282 for moreinformation.

x BALANCE - FADER: This menu item lets youadjust the levels for the balance and faderfeatures of the audio system. See “Adjusting theSpeakers (Balance/Fade)” under Radio with CD onpage 282 for more information.

e EQ (Equalizer): This menu item lets youchoose among five preset equalizations for theaudio system. See “Audio Equalizer” under Radiowith CD on page 282 for more information.

306

H/A (Home/Away) PRESETS: This menu itemlets you switch back and forth between your homeand away preset radio stations. See “PresetsHome/Away” under Radio with CD on page 282for more information.

AUTOSTORE PRESETS: This menu item letsyou automatically store radio stations withthe strongest signals as presets. See “AutostorePresets” under Radio with CD on page 282for more information.

CAT (Category): This menu item lets you selectradio stations based on preset categories. See“Activating Program Type (PTY) Stations”under Radio with CD on page 282 for moreinformation.

TA (Traffic Announcement): This menu item letsyou turn the TA feature on and off. See “TA(Traffic Announcement)” under Radio with CD onpage 282 for more information.

RECALL RDS MESSAGE: This menu item letsyou view an RDS radio station message broadcastby a radio station. See “MSG (Message)” underRadio with CD on page 282 for more information.

AF (Alternate Frequency): This menu item letsyou turn the AF feature on and off. See “ActivatingProgram Type (PTY) Stations (RDS and XM™)”under Radio with CD on page 282 for moreinformation.

ASEEK LOCAL/DISTANT: This feature instructsthe audio system to seek only local radiostations with the strongest signal or to seek allradio stations with a strong signal in a large area.Use LOCAL while in urban areas where thereare several strong radio station signals and youwant to limit the number of stations to thosewith the strongest signals only. Use DISTANTwhile in rural areas where there are fewerradio station signals available.

See “Local/Distant Selection” under Radio with CDon page 282 for more information.

8 SET CLOCK: Use this menu item to setthe time.

See Setting the Time on page 281 for moreinformation.

307

B SET DATE: Use this menu item to setthe date.

See Setting the Time on page 281 for moreinformation.

4 (Information): This menu item is used todisplay XM™ satellite radio service and CD MP3playback information. See “4 (Information)”under Radio with CD on page 282 for moreinformation.

LANG (Language): To change the languagedisplayed on the radio, select LANGUAGEby pressing the tune/select knob. Turn thetune/select knob to scroll through the followingavailable languages:

• ENGLISH

• GERMAN

• FRENCH

• SPANISH

• JAPANESE

To make your selection, press the tune/selectknob. If you accidentally select a language that youdid not want, ENGLISH is always at the top ofthe language list.

SETUP: When you select this menu item, thefollowing submenu is available:

• PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU

• DRIVER SELECTION

• DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS

• CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS

SETUP Submenu ItemsThe following choices are available forprogramming using the Base audio system.

PERSONAL SETTINGS MENUThis item turns the entire list of personalizationfeatures on or off. This item allows you to programcertain features to a preferred setting for up totwo people. The number of available featuresvaries depending upon which options arepurchased. While this item is on, a check markappears after it. For more information on thePERSONAL SETTINGS MENU item, see VehiclePersonalization on page 148.

308

DRIVER SELECTIONWhen you select this item, the following submenudisplays:

• DRIVER 1

• DRIVER 2

• RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS

• STORE DRIVER SETTINGS

For more information on the DRIVER SELECTIONsubmenu item, see “Recalling Driver Settings”and “Storing Driver Settings” under Memory Seat,Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 169.

DRIVER EXIT SETTINGSWhen you select this item, the followingsubmenu displays:

• RECALL EXIT SETTINGS

• STORE EXIT SETTINGS

For more information on the DRIVER EXITSETTINGS submenu item, see “Recalling ExitSettings” and “Storing Exit Settings” under MemorySeat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 169.

CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS(Base Audio System)This item lets you customize the functions of thefour configurable keys located to the left andright of the audio display. See “Configurable RadioDisplay Keys” under Radio with CD on page 282for programming information.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theftof your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it does not operate.If the radio is removed from your vehicle, theoriginal VIN in the radio can be used to trace theradio back to your vehicle.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.

309

Audio Steering Wheel Controls Some audio controlscan be adjusted at thesteering wheel. Theyinclude the following:

0 (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.Press this button again, or any other radiobutton, to turn the sound on.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2(if equipped) radio or CD.

g (OnStar®/Voice Recognition): If your vehiclehas the Radio with CD or Radio with Six-DiscCD audio system, press this button to interact withthe OnStar® system.

Left Side Controls ForBoth STS and STS-V

Right Side ControlsFor STS

Right Side ControlsFor STS-V

310

If your vehicle has the navigation system, pressthis button to initiate voice recognition. See “VoiceRecognition” in the Navigation System manualfor more information. While in Voice Recognition,say “OnStar” to interact with the OnStar® system.See the OnStar® System on page 132 in thismanual for more information.

+u — (Volume): Press this button to increaseor to decrease the volume.

+ t u − (Seek) (STS Only): Press either arrowto go to the next or the previous radio stationand stay there. The radio seeks stations only witha strong signal that are in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press the minus sign to goto the start of the current track, if more than10 seconds have played. Press the plus sign to goto the next track. If either the minus or the plusbutton are pressed more than once, the playercontinues moving backward or forward throughthe CD.

Press and hold the SEEK plus or minus button,until a beep sounds. The CD fast forwards or fastreverses through the CD. Press either buttonagain to play the passage.

¨ (Seek) (STS-V Only): Press the seek arrowto go to the next radio station and stay there.The system will only seek radio stations withstrong frequencies.

While the seek arrow is pressed and held fortwo seconds, the system will scan the radiostations that are in the selected band. If listeningto a CD, the system will advance to the nexttrack of that particular CD.

While a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this arrow to go to the next available CD,if multiple CDs are loaded.

1-6 (Preset Stations): Press this button to playstations that are programmed on the radiopreset pushbuttons. The radio only seeks presetstations with a strong signal that are in theselected band.

While a CD is playing, press this button to go tothe next track.

While a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to go to the next availableCD, if multiple CDs are loaded.

311

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static can occurduring normal radio reception if items such ascellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devices areplugged into the accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AM radiostations boost the power levels during the day, andthen reduces these levels during the night.Static can also occur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radio reception. Whenthis happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsreach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may causethe loss of XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio might display NO XM SIGNAL toindicate interference.

312

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage could cause interferencewith your vehicle’s radio. This interferencecould occur when making or receiving phone calls,charging the phone’s battery, or simply havingthe phone on. This interference is an increasedlevel of static while listening to the radio. If static isreceived while listening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in

a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface.Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

313

Diversity Antenna SystemThe AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rearwindow defogger, located in the rear window.Make sure that the inside surface of the rearwindow is not scratched and that the grid lines onthe glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaceis damaged, it could interfere with radio reception.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in sometinting materials will interfere with or distort theincoming radio reception. Any damage causedto your antenna due to metallic tinting materialswill not be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Do not try to clear frost or othermaterial from the inside of the rear windowwith a razor blade or anything else thatis sharp, as this may damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect your radio’s abilityto pick up stations clearly. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rearwindow defogger is turned on, it could mean thata defogger grid line has been damaged. If thisis true, the grid line must be repaired.

If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to yourvehicle, and the antenna needs to be attachedto the glass, make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antennas are not damaged. Make surethe cellular telephone antenna does not touch agrid line.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

A vehicle with a sunroof might not get thebest performance from the XM™ system if thesunroof is open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

314

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 316Defensive Driving ...................................... 316Drunken Driving ........................................ 317Control of a Vehicle .................................. 320Braking ...................................................... 320Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 321Braking in Emergencies ............................. 323Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 323Competitive Driving Mode (STS-V) ............ 325Magnetic Ride Control ............................... 325Limited-Slip Rear Axle ............................... 325StabiliTrak® System ................................... 326Panic Brake Assist .................................... 327All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .................. 327Steering .................................................... 327Off-Road Recovery .................................... 330Passing ..................................................... 330Loss of Control .......................................... 332

Competitive Driving ................................... 333Driving at Night ......................................... 333Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 335City Driving ............................................... 338Freeway Driving ........................................ 339Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 340Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 341Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 342Winter Driving ........................................... 344If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 348Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 349Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 349

Towing ........................................................ 355Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 355Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 355Towing a Trailer ........................................ 357

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

315

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 15.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

316

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

317

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinkingthree 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine orthree mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generallywill reach a higher BAC level than a man ofher same body weight will when each has thesame number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

318

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or numberof cold showers will speed that up. “I will be careful”is not the right answer. What if there is anemergency, a need to take sudden action, as whena child darts into the street? A person with even amoderate BAC might not be able to react quicklyenough to avoid the collision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

319

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 323 andStabiliTrak® System on page 326.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 363.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 248.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

320

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time tocool between hard stops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If youkeep pace with the traffic and allow realisticfollowing distances, you will eliminate a lot ofunnecessary braking. That means better brakingand longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start the engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may heara momentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on, and you may even notice that thebrake pedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 249.

321

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, the computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

322

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You mayhear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle has a traction control system thatlimits wheel spin. This is especially useful inslippery road conditions. On a rear-wheel-drivevehicle, the system operates if it senses thatone or both of the rear wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive(AWD) vehicle, the system will operate if itsenses that any of the wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When this happens, thesystem brakes the spinning wheel(s) and/orreduces engine power to limit wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

This warning light willcome on to let youknow if there’s aproblem with yourtraction control system.

See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Lighton page 250. When this warning light is on, thesystem will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

323

The traction control system automatically comeson whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheelspin, especially in slippery road conditions, youshould always leave the system on. But youcan turn the traction control system off if youever need to.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brake or accelerateheavily when the TCS is off. You coulddamage your vehicle’s driveline.

When the TCS is switched off on AWD and STS-Vvehicles, you may still feel the system working.This is normal and necessary with the hardware onyour vehicle.

You should turn the system off if your vehicle evergets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See Rocking Your Vehicleto Get It Out on page 349 and If Your Vehicleis Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 348for more information. See also Winter Drivingon page 344 for information on using TCS whendriving in snowy or icy conditions.

To turn the system off,press the TC (tractioncontrol) buttonlocated near theshift lever.

If you press the TC button once, the tractioncontrol system will turn off and the traction controlsystem warning light will come on. Press theTC button again to turn the system back on. If youpress and hold the TC button for five seconds,the StabiliTrak® system and the traction controlsystem will turn off. Press the TC button again toturn StabiliTrak® back on. For more information,see StabiliTrak® System on page 326.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 363 for more information.

324

Competitive Driving Mode (STS-V)The driver can select this optional handling modeby pressing the Traction Control button, locatednear the shift lever, twice within five seconds.Competitive driving mode allows the driver to havecontrol of the power applied to the rear wheels,while the StabiliTrak® system helps steer thevehicle by selective brake application. Incompetitive mode, the levels at which StabiliTrak®

is engaged have been modified to better suit aperformance driving environment. When thetraction control warning light is on, the TractionControl System will not be operating. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

When you press the Traction Control button again,the Traction Control System will be on. Thetraction engaged symbol will be displayedtemporarily in the DIC and a chime will be heard.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 264for more information.

Magnetic Ride ControlYour vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control thatautomatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle.Automatic ride control is achieved througha computer used to control and monitor thesuspension system. The controller receives inputfrom various sensors to determine the propersystem response. If the controller detects aproblem within the system, the DIC will display aSERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 264for more information. See your dealer for service.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleYour limited-slip rear axle can give you additionaltraction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. Itworks like a standard axle most of the time, butwhen one of the rear wheels has no tractionand the other does, this feature will allowthe wheel with traction to move the vehicle.

325

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stabilityenhancement system called StabiliTrak®. Itis an advanced computer controlled system thatassists you with directional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak® activates when the computer senses adiscrepancy between your intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak® selectively applies braking pressure atany one of the vehicle’s brakes to help steer thevehicle in the direction which you are steering.

When the system activates, a STABILITY SYSACTIVE message will be displayed on the DriverInformation Center. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 264. You may also hear anoise or feel vibration in the brake pedal. This isnormal. Continue to steer the vehicle in thedirection you want it to go.

If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®, aSERVICE STABILITY SYS message will bedisplayed on the Driver Information Center. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 264. Whenthis message is displayed, the system is notoperational. Driving should be adjustedaccordingly.

StabiliTrak® comes on automatically whenever youstart your vehicle. To help assist you withdirectional control of the vehicle, you shouldalways leave the system on. You can turnStabiliTrak® off if you ever need to through theTC (traction control) on/off button. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 323.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when theStabiliTrak® activates, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, you may reengagethe cruise control. See Cruise Control onpage 193 or Adaptive Cruise Control on page 197for more information.

326

Panic Brake AssistYour vehicle has a panic brake assist system thatmonitors the intention of the driver while braking. Ifthe system senses that the driver has appliedhard/fast pressure to the brake pedal, the systemwill generate additional pressure, making it easierfor the driver to maintain brake application. Whenthis happens the brake pedal will feel easier topush. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and letthe system work for you. You may feel the brakesvibrate, or you may notice some noise but this isnormal. The brakes will return to normal operationafter the brake pedal has been released.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) SystemIf your vehicle is equipped with this feature, enginepower is sent to all four wheels all the time.

This is like four-wheel drive, but it is fullyautomatic.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but it will take much more effort.

Speed Variable Assist SteeringYour vehicle has a steering system thatcontinuously adjusts the effort you feel whensteering at all vehicle speeds. It provides easewhen parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highwayspeeds.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

327

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demand toomuch of those places. You can lose control.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 323and StabiliTrak® System on page 326.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it to go, and slow down.

Since your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,the system may be active. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 264 and StabiliTrak® Systemon page 326.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.

To help you steer in the direction you want to go,during certain sharp or sudden corneringmaneuvers, gear selection is controlled. This willmaximize the available drive wheel torque andminimize the transmission response time and shiftactivity. During this kind of maneuver, thetransmission shifts automatically as vehiclespeed changes.


328

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time. Butsometimes you cannot; there is not room. Thatis the time for evasive action — steering aroundthe problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 320. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention anda quick decision. If you are holding the steeringwheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But youhave to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoidedthe object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

329

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your vehicle’s right wheels havedropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile you are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

330

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

331

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helpsavoid only the acceleration skid. If your tractioncontrol system is off, then an accelerationskid is also best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

With StabiliTrak®, you may see the STABILITYSYS ACTIVE message on the Driver InformationCenter. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 264.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

332

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

Competitive DrivingSee your warranty book before using your vehiclefor competitive driving.

Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitivedriving, the engine may use more oil than itwould with normal use. Low oil levels candamage the engine. Be sure to check the oillevel often during competitive driving and keepthe level at or near the upper mark thatshows the proper operating range on theengine oil dipstick. For information on how toadd oil, see Engine Oil on page 380.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

333

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

334

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction.

It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even ifyour windshield wiper blades are in good shape, aheavy rain can make it harder to see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of theroad, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signs ofstreaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate fromthe inserts.

335

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply the brake pedallightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect yourbrakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot,try to slow down before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

336

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough the engine’s air intake and badlydamage the engine. Never drive through waterthat is slightly lower than the underbody of yourvehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles orstanding water, drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.As little as six inches of flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. SeeTires on page 421.

337

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 339.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be runningthe red light.

338

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads. Butthey have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it isslower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

339

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you will find experienced and able service expertsin GM dealerships all across North America. Theywill be ready and willing to help if you need it.

340

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are thelenses clean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

341

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transmission. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes couldget so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhill slope.

342

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. The brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have theengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let the engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool the engine and transmission, and you canclimb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

343

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 421.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

344

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Traction control improves your ability to acceleratewhen driving on a slippery road. Even though yourvehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS), youwill want to slow down and adjust your driving to theroad conditions. Under certain conditions, you maywant to turn the TCS off, such as when drivingthrough deep snow and loose gravel, to helpmaintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 323,StabiliTrak® System on page 326, Rocking YourVehicle to Get It Out on page 349, and “WinterTires” under Tires on page 421.

345

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 321.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid suddensteering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

346

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blocking theexhaust pipe. And check around againfrom time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.

347

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin the wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, thetransmission or other parts of the vehiclecan overheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. Whenyou are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroyparts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shifting thetransmission back and forth, you can destroythe transmission.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 447.

348

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.You should turn the traction control systemoff. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 323. Then shift back and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning thewheels as little as possible. Release theaccelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightlyon the accelerator pedal when the transmissionis in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels inthe forward and reverse directions, you will causea rocking motion that may free your vehicle. Ifthat does not get your vehicle out after a few tries,it may need to be towed out. If your vehicledoes need to be towed out, see Towing YourVehicle on page 355.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label, and the Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

349

Tire and Loading Information Label A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).The Tire and Loading Information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe tire size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation see Tireson page 421 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 431.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Example Label

350

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed nor intended totow any trailer.

351

Item Description Total

A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)



BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =

750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

352



BSubtract OccupantWeight 200 lbs(91 kg) × 5 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is attached toeither the driver’s door edge or the lower centerpillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This labelshows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

Example 3

353

The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo. The Certificationlabel also shows the maximum weights for thefront and rear axles, called the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). Never exceed the GVWR orthe GAWR for either the front or rear axle.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else, they will goas fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop orturn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.In a trunk, put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded down unlessyou need to.

354

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Service on page 531.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see Recreational Vehicle Towingfollowing.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you will want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 340.

355

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do nottow your vehicle with all four wheels on theground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed withall four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle mustbe towed, you should use a dolly. See “DollyTowing” later in this section for more information.

Dolly Towing (Rear-Wheel-DriveVehicles) (STS Only)

Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing yourvehicle may cause damage because of reducedground clearance. Always tow your vehicleusing the dolly towing or dinghy towingprocedure listed in this section or put yourvehicle on a flatbed truck.

If your vehicle is a rear-wheel drive, it can be towedusing a dolly. To tow your vehicle using a dolly,follow these steps:

1. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).

356

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designed fortowing.

5. Release the parking brake.

Dolly Towing (STS-V)

Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing yourvehicle may cause damage because of reducedground clearance. Always put your vehicleon a flatbed truck.

If you have an STS-V, it can only be towed on aflat-bed trailer.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground, or evenwith only two of its wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components. Do not towan all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheelswill be on the ground.

If you have an All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle, itcan only be towed on a flat-bed trailer.

Towing a TrailerYour vehicle is neither designed nor intended totow a trailer.

357

✍ NOTES

358

Service ........................................................ 362Accessories and Modifications ................... 363California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 363Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 364Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your

Vehicle ................................................... 365Fuel ............................................................. 365

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 365Gasoline Specifications .............................. 366California Fuel ........................................... 366Additives ................................................... 367Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 368Filling the Tank ......................................... 368Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 371

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 372Hood Release ........................................... 372Engine Compartment Overview .................. 373Engine Oil ................................................. 380Engine Oil Life System .............................. 383Supercharger Oil ....................................... 385Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 386Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 388

Engine Coolant .......................................... 389Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 393Engine Overheating ................................... 393Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ..................................... 395Cooling System ......................................... 396Power Steering Fluid ................................. 403Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 404Brakes ...................................................... 405Battery ...................................................... 408Jump Starting ............................................ 408

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 414Rear Axle .................................................... 416Front Axle ................................................... 417Bulb Replacement ....................................... 417

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ..... 418Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 418Back-Up Lamps ......................................... 418Replacement Bulbs ................................... 419

Windshield Replacement ............................ 419Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 419

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

359

Tires ............................................................ 421Winter Tires .............................................. 422Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 423Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 426Run-Flat Tires (STS-V) .............................. 429Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 431High-Speed Operation ............................... 432Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 433Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 438When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 440Buying New Tires ...................................... 441Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 443Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 444Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 445Wheel Replacement .................................. 445Tire Chains ............................................... 447Lifting Your Vehicle (STS-V) ...................... 448If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 451Tire Inflator Kit .......................................... 452Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 464Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 465Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 466

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 473Compact Spare Tire .................................. 475

Appearance Care ........................................ 476Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 476Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 477Leather ...................................................... 478Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 479Wood Panels ............................................. 479Speaker Covers ........................................ 479Care of Safety Belts .................................. 479Weatherstrips ............................................ 480Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 480Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 480Finish Care ............................................... 481Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 481Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 482Tires ......................................................... 483Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 483Finish Damage .......................................... 483Underbody Maintenance ............................ 483Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 484Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 484


360

Vehicle Identification .................................. 485Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 485Service Parts Identification Label ............... 485

Electrical System ........................................ 486Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 486Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 486Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 486

Power Windows and Other PowerOptions .................................................. 487

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 487Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 488Rear Underseat Fuse Block ....................... 492

Capacities and Specifications .................... 498


361

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

362

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessories may evencause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

363

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you should use the proper service manual. Ittells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order the properservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 543.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 78.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 521.

364

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep your engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

The 8th digit of your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) shows the code letter or numberthat identifies your engine. You will find the VIN atthe top left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 485.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine(VIN Code 7), use regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 or higher. Forbest performance or trailer towing, you maychoose to use middle grade 89 octane unleadedgasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,you may notice an audible knocking noise whenyou drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. Ifthis occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher as soon as possible. If you are usinggasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hearheavy knocking, your engine needs service.

If your vehicle has the 4.6L V8 engine(VIN Code A), use premium unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 91 or higher. You mayalso use regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s accelerationmay be slightly reduced, and you may notice aslight audible knocking noise, commonly referred toas spark knock.

365

If the octane is less than 87, you may notice aheavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs,use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soonas possible. Otherwise, you might damage yourengine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

If your vehicle has the 4.4L V8 engine(VIN Code D), use premium unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 91 or higher. For bestperformance, use premium unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 93. In an emergency, youcan use regular unleaded gasoline with an octanerating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane fuel is used, donot perform any aggressive driving maneuvers suchas wide open throttle applications. You may alsohear audible spark knock during acceleration. Refillyour tank with premium fuel as soon as possible toavoid damaging your engine. If you are usinggasoline rated at 91 octane or higher and you hearheavy knocking, your engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 367 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. See theunderhood emission control label. If this fuel is notavailable in states adopting California emissionsstandards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily onfuels meeting federal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance may be affected.

366

The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on andyour vehicle may fail a smog-check test. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 252. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not becovered by your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,your dealer has additives that will help correctand prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldnot be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.

367

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any otherfuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not usecellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against thelaw in some places. Do not re-entervehicle while pumping fuel. Keep childrenaway from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

368

The tethered fuel capis located behind ahinged fuel door on thepassenger’s side ofthe vehicle.

To open the fuel door, apply pressure in thecenter of the rear edge of the fuel door and it willpop open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it;if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back tothe right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank, and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 480.

369

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 252.

The CHECK GAS CAP message will appear onthe Driver Information Center (DIC) display ifthe fuel cap is not reinstalled properly. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 264 formore information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 252.

370

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.



• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumpinggasoline.

• Do not use a cellular phone whilepumping gasoline.

371

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hoodrelease lever withthis symbol onit. It is located insidethe vehicle on thelower left side of theinstrument panel.

372

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and findthe secondary hood release lever. The leveris located under the front edge of thegrille near the center. Move the release leverto the side and raise the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then pull the hood down andclose it firmly.

Engine Compartment OverviewYour vehicle may be equipped with frontcompartment underhood sight shields, whichsurround the vehicle’s engine cover. These sightshields will need to be removed in order to accesssome of the underhood components in your vehicle.

To remove the sight shields, turn the fasteners oneach shield to the left until they pop out. Thenremove the fasteners and lift the shields up andaway from the tower to tower brace.

373

3.6L V6 Engine

374

After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 3.6L V6 engine, here is what you will see:

A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 488.

B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 404.

C. Battery. See Battery on page 408.D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See

Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 239.E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power

Steering Fluid on page 403.F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine

Oil” under Engine Oil on page 380.

G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 380.

H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 405.

I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap onpage 393 and Cooling System on page 396.

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 386.

375

4.6L V8 Engine

376

After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 4.6L V8 engine, here is what you will see:

A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 488.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 408.C. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See

Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 239.D. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See

“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 404.

E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 403.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 380.

G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 380.

H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 405.

I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap onpage 393 and Cooling System on page 396.

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 386.

377

4.4L V8 STS-V Engine

378

After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 4.4L V8 STS-V engine, here is whatyou will see:

A. Battery. See Battery on page 408.B. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse

Block on page 488.C. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See

Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 239.D. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See

“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 404.

E. Intercooler System Pressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 389.

F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 403.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 380.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 380.

I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 405.

J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap onpage 393 and Cooling System on page 396.

K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 386.

If your vehicle is equipped with front compartmentunderhood sight shields, before closing thehood be sure to reinstall the sight shields. Toreinstall the shields, locate the tabs on the left andright sides and insert them into the openings inthe tower to tower brace. Then insert the fastenersinto the top of the shield and push the fastenersback into place.

379

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 373for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

V6 Engine

V8 Engine

380

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at thetip of the dipstick, you need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use the rightkind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 498.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 373 for thelocation of the engine oilfill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all the way back in when you arethrough.

381

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

• GM4718M

Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oilmeeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meetingthis standard may be identified as synthetic.However, not all synthetic oils will meetthis GM standard. Look for and use only an oilthat meets GM Standard GM4718M.

Notice: If you use oils that do not have theGM4718M Standard designation, you can causeengine damage not covered by your warranty.• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this on the oil container, and use onlythose oils that are identified as meeting GMStandard GM4718M and have the starburst symbolon the front of the oil container.

382

Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with aMobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets allrequirements for your vehicle.

Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintainengine oil level, oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M may not be available. You can addsubstitute oil designated SAE 5W-30 withthe starburst symbol at all temperatures. Substituteoil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M shouldnot be used for an oil change.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMstandards are all you need for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

Notice: If your vehicle is an STS-V model, theengine uses a special oil filter. The use ofany other engine oil filter could lead to filterfailure and result in severe engine damage.Damage caused by use of the wrong engine oilfilter would not be covered by your newvehicle warranty.

383

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage in the DIC will come on. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 264. Changeyour oil as soon as possible within the next600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the oil life systemmay not indicate that an oil change is necessary forover a year. However, your engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a year and at thistime the system must be reset. Your dealer hasGM-trained service people who will perform thiswork using genuine GM parts and reset the system.It is also important to check your oil regularly andkeep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message in the DIC being turned on,reset the system.

After the oil has been changed, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message must be reset. Toreset the message use the following procedure:

1. Press the up or down arrow to scroll the DICto show OIL LIFE.

2. Once the XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu itemis highlighted, press and hold the RESETbutton until the percentage shows 100%.If the percentage does not return to 100% or ifthe CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes back on when you start yourvehicle, the engine oil life system has notreset. Repeat the procedure.

384

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that maybe unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for verylong. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlydispose of clothing or rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the useand disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing of yourused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

Supercharger OilBecause they are technically qualified and havethe proper tools, you should have your dealerperform this maintenance.

When to CheckSee Additional Required Services on page 508 forwhen the oil level should be checked.

What Kind of Oil to UseUse only the recommended supercharger oil. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 516.

385

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter is in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle,near the front. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 373 for more information on locatingthe air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 505 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engineoil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the filter in the 3.6L V6 or4.6L V8 engines, do the following:

1. Remove the two screws located on the top ofthe cover.

2. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose so thatit is not going across the top of the engine aircleaner/filter.

4.6L V8 Engine shown, 3.6L V6 Engine similar

386

3. Loosen the clamp and remove the duct fromthe passenger’s side of the engine aircleaner/filter.

4. The two sides of the airbox are hinged at thebottom. Open the airbox by pushing the top ofthe airbox cover toward the engine.

5. Remove the air filter by lifting it straight upthrough the opening in the airbox.

6. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.See Normal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 518 for the correct part numberfor the filter.

7. Reinstall the cover by reversingSteps 1 through 4.

If your vehicle has the 4.4L V8 STS-V engine,there is a special procedure for checkingand changing the air cleaner/filter. Because thisprocedure is difficult, you should have this done atthe dealership service department. Contact yourdealer for additional information or the procedurecan be found in the service manual. To purchasea service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 543.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to beburned. The air cleaner not only cleans theair; it helps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and the enginebackfires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be careful working onthe engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

387

Automatic Transmission Fluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the transmission fluidlevel. A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take thevehicle to the dealership service department andhave it repaired as soon as possible.

There is a special procedure for checking andchanging the transmission fluid. Becausethis procedure is difficult, you should have thisdone at the dealership service department.

Contact your dealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in the service manual.To purchase a service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 543.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 516.Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 508, andbe sure to use the fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 516.

388

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 393.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® may cause premature engine,heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant may require changingsooner, at the first maintenance service aftereach 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)coolant in your vehicle.

389

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than once ortwice a year, have your dealer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 516 for more information.

390

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank and pressure cap arelocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle, towardthe rear of the engine compartment. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 373 formore information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of thesurge tank. Follow the arrow from the top ofthe tank down the side to the horizontal mark.

391

Checking Intercooler System Coolant(4.4L V8 STS-V Engine Only)

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 373for the location of the intercooler systempressure cap.

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

Park the vehicle on a level surface and turn off theengine. When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be visible in the intercooler fill neck.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the intercooler fillneck, but only when the engine is cool. SeeCooling System on page 396 for instructions onhow to add coolant to the intercooler fill neck.

392

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing a pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fullyinstalled on the coolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 373 for moreinformation on location.

Engine OverheatingThere are two engine hot messages that could bedisplayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 264 formore information.

If the engine is overheating, then you will find acoolant temperature gage and a coolant warninglight on the instrument panel. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 251 andEngine Coolant Temperature Warning Light onpage 251 for more information.

393

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Turn itoff and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 395 forinformation on driving to a safe place inan emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 395 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineAn overheat warning, can indicate a seriousproblem.

If you get an engine overheat warning but see orhear no steam, the problem might not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

394

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to doso, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Set the climate controls to the highest heatsetting and fan speed and open the windows,as necessary.

If the coolant warning light is not on or the coolanttemperature gage does not indicate the engineis overheating, you can drive. Just to be safe, driveslower for about 10 minutes. If the warnings donot come back on, drive normally.

If the warnings continue and you have not stopped,pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine forthree minutes while parked. If the warnings arestill indicated, turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”later in this section.

You might decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis operating mode allows your vehicle to bedriven to a safe place in an emergency. Should anoverheated engine condition exist, an overheatprotection mode which alternates firing groups ofcylinders helps prevent engine damage. In thismode, you will notice a loss in power and engineperformance. An engine overheat warning willindicate that an overheat condition exists. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer inthe overheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheatedengine protection operating mode, to avoidengine damage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss and change the oil. See Engine Oil onpage 380.

395

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, this iswhat you will see:

A. Engine Cooling FansB. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap

Some vehicles may have an engine driven fan, aswell as the electric pusher fans which arelocated behind the vehicle’s grille.

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

When the engine is cold, the coolant levelshould be at or slightly above the FULLCOLD/FROID line on the side of the coolant surgetank. If it is not, you may have a leak at thepressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere elsein the cooling system.

3.6L V6 Engine shown, 4.6L V8 and 4.4L V8 STS-VEngines similar

396

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 395 for information ondriving to a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

397

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not at the FULLCOLD/FROID line on the side of the coolantsurge tank, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it. See Engine Coolant onpage 389 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolant



surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

398

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure capwhen the cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap and upperradiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn thepressure cap slowly counterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss,wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

399

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to slightlyabove the FULL COLD/FROID line on theside of the coolant surge tank.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Theupper radiator hose is the largest of thehoses which comes out of the radiator, on thepassenger side of the vehicle. Watch outfor the engine cooling fans.

By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the levelis lower, add more of the proper mixtureto the coolant surge tank until the levelreaches the FULL COLD/FROID line on theside of the coolant surge tank.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

Start the engine and allow it to warm up.

How to Add Coolant to the IntercoolerSystem Fill Neck (4.4L V8 STS-VEngine Only)If you have not found a problem yet, turn theengine off and allow it to cool down, then check tosee if coolant is visible within the horizontaltube section of the fill neck. If coolant is not visible,add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL® coolant to the fill neck. Be surethe Intercooler System, including the IntercoolerSystem pressure cap, is cool before doing so. SeeEngine Coolant on page 389 for more information.

400

{CAUTION:

Turning the Intercooler System pressurecap when the engine and intercooler arehot can allow steam and scalding liquidsto blow out and burn you badly. Neverturn the Intercooler System pressure cap,even a little, when the engine andintercooler are hot.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, your



engine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

401

1. Remove the Intercooler System pressure capwhen the Intercooler System, including theupper intercooler hoses, are no longerhot. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one-quarter of a turn.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.This allows any pressure still left to be vented.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixtureto the fill neck, until the coolant reaches theCOLD FILL line on the fill neck.

4. With the Intercooler System pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run for a couple ofminutes. Then turn the engine off. By this time,the coolant level inside the fill neck may belower. If the level drops to where coolant is nolonger visible in the horizontal tube sectionof the fill neck, with the engine off add more ofthe DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to the fillneck until the level is again visible in thehorizontal tube section.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.If the coolant is not at the proper levelwhen the system cools down again, seeyour dealer.

402

Power Steering Fluid

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 373 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak inthe system or you hear an unusual noise. Afluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be within the HOT mark. Ifnecessary, add only enough fluid to bring thelevel within the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 516.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

403

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer FluidThe CHECK WASHER FLUID message willappear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)when the fluid level is low. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 264 for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 373for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

404

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 373 forreservoir locationand access.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well, orwill not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low, theCHECK BRAKE FLUID message will bedisplayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 264.

405

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, DOT-3 brake fluidis recommended for use. DOT-4 brake fluid isalso compatible with your vehicle’s brake systemparts. However, if you choose to use DOT-4fluid, it is recommended that you flush your brakehydraulic system and refill it with new DOT-4fluid at a regular maintenance service everytwo years. See Additional Required Services onpage 508. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 516.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 480.

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

406

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality GM brake parts. When you replace partsof your braking system — for example, when yourbrake linings wear down and you need new onesput in — be sure you get new approvedreplacement parts. If you do not, your brakes mayno longer work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,the balance between your front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

407

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 373 for battery locationand access.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 408 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

408

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

409

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlets. Turn off the radio and all lampsthat are not needed. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries. And it couldsave the radio.

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)and negative (−) terminal locations of theother vehicle, as well as the positive (+)terminal location on your vehicle’s battery.See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 373 for more information on the locationof the battery.

Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)ground location, as shown in the illustration.

410

It is located between the battery and theunderhood fuse block. You should always usethis remote ground location, instead of theterminal on the battery.

Notice: If you connect a negative cable to theECM, ECM mounting bracket, or any cablesthat attach to the ECM bracket, you maydamage the ECM. Always attach the negativecable to your vehicle’s remote negative groundlocation, instead of the ECM, ECM bracket,or any cables attached to the ECM bracket.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you need morelight. Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. But ifa battery has filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low, addwater to take care of that first. If you do not,explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

411

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

412

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative terminal of the good battery. Usea remote negative (−) terminal if the vehiclehas one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes toa heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one. Your vehicle’s remotenegative (−) ground location is for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

413

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

All-Wheel DriveIf your vehicle is equipped with all-wheel-drive,this is an additional system that needs lubrication.

Jumper Cable Removal

414

Transfer CaseWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check the transfercase fluid unless you suspect there is a leakor you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

A. Drain PlugB. Fill Plug

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the transfer case, you’ll need toadd some lubricant. Add enough lubricant toraise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.Use care not to overtighten the plug.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 516.

415

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.



If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the rear axle, you’ll need to addsome lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raisethe level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.


416

Front AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check the front axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or youhear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicatea problem. Have it inspected and repaired.


A. Drain PlugB. Filler Plug


If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the front axle, you may needto add some lubricant.


Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 419.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

417

High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting

{CAUTION:

The low beam high intensity dischargelighting system operates at a very highvoltage. If you try to service any of thesystem components, you could beseriously injured. Have your dealer or aqualified technician service them.

Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After yourvehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,you may notice that the beam is a slightly differentshade than it was originally. This is normal.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

Back-Up LampsTo replace a back-up lamp bulb, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 101for more information.

418

2. Pull out the push pins holding down the topportion of the cloth cover.

3. Fold the cover down slightly and locate thelamp assembly.

4. Turn the socket counterclockwise and pull itstraight out to remove it from the lampassembly.

5. Pull the old bulb straight out and reinstall thenew bulb.

6. Reverse the steps to reinstall.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb NumberBack-up 3157K

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

Windshield ReplacementKeep in mind that your windshield is part of theHead-Up Display (HUD) system. If you ever haveto get your windshield replaced, be sure to getone that is designed for HUD or your HUD imagemay look blurred or out of focus.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 505.It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiperblade assembly on a regular basis or when worn.For proper windshield wiper blade length andtype, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 518.

419

STS-V models will automatically move thewindshield wipers to the park position if the hoodis open. Make sure the hood is closed beforereplacing your windshield wiper blades.

To replace the wiper blade assembly, do thefollowing:

1. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away fromthe windshield.

2. Squeeze the tabs on each side of the wiperblade assembly and slide the assembly offthe end of the wiper arm.

3. Replace the blade assembly with a new one.Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield when no wiper blade is installedcould damage the windshield. Any damagethat occurs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not allow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.

4. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.

420

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet fordetails. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 349.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour tires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 431.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

See High-Speed Operation on page 432 forinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed driving.

421

Low-Profile Performance TiresIf your vehicle has 255/45ZR18, P255/45R18 orP275/40R19 100Y size tires, they are classified aslow-profile performance tires. These tires aredesigned for very responsive driving on wet or drypavement. You may also notice more road noisewith low-profile performance tires and that they tendto wear faster. These performance tires are notrated as all-season tires. Winter tires arerecommended for snow or ice covered roads.

Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,they are more susceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damagecan occur when coming into contact with roadhazards like, potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into a curb. Your GMwarranty does not cover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressureand, when possible avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other road hazards.

Winter TiresIf you expect to drive on snow or ice coveredroads often, you may want to get winter tires foryour vehicle. All season tires provide good overall

performance on most surfaces but they may notoffer the traction you would like or the samelevel of performance as winter tires on snow or icecovered roads.

Winter tires, in general, are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice covered roads. Withwinter tires, there may be decreased dryroad traction, increased road noise, and shortertread life. After switching to winter tires, be alert forchanges in vehicle handling and braking.

See your dealer for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection. Also,see Buying New Tires on page 441.

If you choose to use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand and tread type onall four wheel positions.

• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, loadrange, and speed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as youroriginal equipment tires may not be available for H,V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choosewinter tires with a lower speed rating, neverexceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.

422

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

423

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 444.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. Ifyour vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 475 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 451.

Compact Spare Tire Example

424

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit: Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 431.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standards setby the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

425

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent ashigh as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheelin inches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatictransmission/transaxle, power steering, powerbrakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

426

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 431.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 349.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 349.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rearaxle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 349.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side ofan asymmetrical tire, that must always faceoutward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

427

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 349.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 431 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 349.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plycords that extend to the beads are laid at 90degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

428

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 440.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 444.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 349.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 349.

Run-Flat Tires (STS-V)If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no sparetire and no tire changing equipment. Yourvehicle also has a Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) which will alert you if there is aloss of tire pressure in any of the tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor System on page 433.

{CAUTION:

When the low tire warning light isdisplayed on the instrument panel cluster,your vehicle’s handling capabilities will bereduced during severe maneuvers. If youdrive too fast, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. You or others could beinjured. Do not drive over 55 mph(90 km/h) when the low tire warning lightis displayed. Drive cautiously and checkyour tire pressures as soon as you can.

429

If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on theside of the road to change the tire. You canjust keep on driving. The vehicle’s run-flat tirescan operate effectively with no air pressure for upto 50 miles (80 km) at speeds up to 55 mph(90 km/h). The shorter the distance you drive andthe slower the speed, the greater the chancethat the tire will not have to be replaced. When atire is filled with air, it provides a cushionbetween the road and the wheel. Because you willnot have this cushion when driving on a deflatedrun-flat tire, try to avoid potholes that coulddamage your wheel and require replacement of it.

Some road hazards can damage a tire beyondrepair. This damage could occur even before youhave driven on the tire in a deflated condition.When a tire has been damaged, or if you havedriven any distance on a deflated run-flat tire, checkwith an authorized run-flat tire service center, assoon as possible, to determine whether the tire canbe repaired or should be replaced. To maintain yourvehicle’s run-flat feature, all replacement tires mustbe self-supporting tires. To locate the nearest GMor authorized run-flat servicing facility, callRoadside Service. See Roadside Service onpage 531 for details.

{CAUTION:

Run-flat tires are constructed differentlythan other tires and could explode duringimproper service. You or others could beinjured or killed if you attempt to repair,replace, dismount, or mount a run-flat tire.Let only an authorized run-flat servicecenter repair, replace, dismount, andmount run-flat tires.

The valve stems on your vehicle’s run-flat tireshave sensors that are part of the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). These sensors containbatteries which are designed to last for 10 yearsunder normal driving conditions. See your GMdealer, if the TPMS sensors or a wheel ever needreplacement.

Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage thetire valves and tire pressure monitor sensors inyour vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage wouldnot be covered by warranty. Do not use liquidsealants in your vehicle’s run-flat tires.

430

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’sdoor latch. This label lists your vehicle’s originalequipment tires and shows the correct inflationpressures for your tires when they are cold. Therecommended cold tire inflation pressure,shown on the label, is the minimum amount of airpressure needed to support your vehicle’smaximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe tire and loading information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 349. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort, never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, if yourvehicle has one. The compact spare should be at60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 475.

431

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare underinflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additionalstrain on tires. Sustained high-speeddriving causes excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure. Youcould have a crash and you or otherscould be killed. Some high-speed ratedtires require inflation pressure adjustmentfor high speed operation. When speedlimits and road conditions are such that avehicle can be driven at high speeds,make sure the tires are rated for highspeed operation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tire inflationpressure for the vehicle load.

432

If you will be driving at high speeds, speeds of100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, setthe cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflationpressure shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi(265 kPa), whichever is lower. See the examplefollowing. When you end this high-speed driving,return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shownon the Tire and Loading Information label. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 349.

Example:

You will find the maximum load and inflationpressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in smallletters, near the rim flange. It will read somethinglike this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs)300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.

For this example, you would set the inflationpressure for high-speed driving at38 psi (265 kPa).

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemYour vehicle has a Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS). This system uses radio andsensor technology to check tire pressure levels.Sensors are mounted onto each tire andwheel assembly, except the compact spare tireand wheel. The TPMS sensors monitor theair pressure in your vehicle’s tires and transmitsthe tire pressure readings to a receiver located inthe vehicle.

Using the Driver Information Center (DIC), tirepressure levels may be viewed by the driver. Foradditional information and details about theDIC operation and displays see DIC Controls andDisplays on page 258 and DIC Warnings andMessages on page 264.

If a low tire pressure condition is detected, theTPMS will display the CHECK TIRE PRESSUREwarning message on the DIC display and, atthe same time, illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol, on the instrument panel cluster.

433

The tire pressure warning light may come on incool weather when the vehicle is first started, andthen turn off as you start to drive. This couldbe an early indicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofa different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with atire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) thatilluminates a low tirepressure telltale whenone or more of your tiresis significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

434

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached toyour vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 349for an example of the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 431.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tirepressure condition but it does not replace normaltire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 438 and Tires on page 421.

Notice: Your vehicle has a Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). Use only theGM-provided tire sealant. Other liquid tiresealants may damage the tire pressuresensors.

435

TPMS Sensor Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors or rotate your vehicle’s tires,the identification codes will need to be matched tothe new tire/wheel position. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions in the followingorder: driver side front tire, passenger side fronttire, passenger side rear tire, and driver siderear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See yourGM dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’spressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall. Ifusing this method to match TPMS sensors, thecomplete procedure outlined below must beperformed within 15 minutes of the vehicle beingstationary.

You will have one minute to match the firsttire/wheel position, and five minutes overall, tomatch all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longerthan one minute to match the first tire andwheel, or more than five minutes to match allfour tire/wheel positions, the matching processstops and you will need to start over.

The TPM matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Press the push-button ignition switch to Acc.(Off/Accessory).

3. Using the Keyless Access transmitter, lockand unlock the vehicle’s doors.

4. Press the lock and unlock buttons, at thesame time, on the Keyless Accesstransmitter. A single horn chirp will sound,indicating that the TPMS is ready, andthe sensor matching process can begin.

5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.

436

6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.Activate the TPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire’s air pressure forfive seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. Thehorn chirp, which may take up to 30 seconds tosound, confirms that the sensor identificationcode has been matched to this tire position. Todecrease the tire’s air-pressure use the pointedend of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressuregauge, or a key.

7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

10. After hearing the confirming single horn chirpfor the driver’s side rear tire, a double hornchirp will sound to signal the tire matchingmode is no longer active. Press thepush-button ignition switch to Acc.

11. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the tire andloading information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will bedisplayed on the DIC screen. This message shouldgo off once you re-install the road tire containingthe TPM sensor.

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and Science CanadaThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



437





Tire Inspection and RotationTire rotation is not recommended if your vehiclehas the following performance tire combinations:

• P235/50R17 size tires on the front wheelsand P255/45R17 size tires on the rearwheels.

• P235/50R18 size tires on the front wheels andP255/45R18 size tires on the rear wheels.

• P255/45R18 size tires on the front wheels andP275/40R19 size tires on the rear wheels.

Different tire sizes should not be rotated front torear. Each tire and wheel should only be usedin the original front or rear position it is in.

Tire rotation is recommended if your vehicle isequipped with P235/50R17 size tires on allfour wheel positions or 255/45ZR18 size tires onall four wheel positions. These tires should berotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to13 000 km)

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 440and Wheel Replacement on page 445 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 505.

438

When rotating P235/50R17 size tires or255/45ZR18 size tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, do notinclude the compact spare tire in the tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust thefront and rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label.

Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) will need to have the TPMSsensors reset after a tire rotation, see TirePressure Monitor System on page 433.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 498.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 464.

439

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

440

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new, weredesigned to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires, GMstrongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded

onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer. Ifthe tires have an all-season tread design, theTPC Spec number will be followed by an MS formud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 423 for additional information.

The optional 18-inch performance tires, size255/45ZR18 99Y, used on some vehicles, meetthe General Motors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) rating but the TPC Speccode has not been molded onto the tire’ssidewall. If your vehicle has these tires, and youneed to replace them, you can still get these TPCSpec rated tires by asking your GM dealer.Your GM dealer can order these tires by partnumber. This way, your vehicle will continue togive the proper endurance, handling, traction, andride as the original tires.

441

Winter tires with the same speed rating as youroriginal equipment tires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. If you choosesnow tires with a lower speed rating, never exceedthe tire’s maximum speed capability.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes (other than those originallyinstalled on your vehicle), brands, ortypes (radial and bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires ofdifferent sizes (other than those originallyinstalled on your vehicle), brands, ortypes may also cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use the correct size,brand, and type of tires on all wheels. It isall right to drive with your vehicle’scompact spare temporarily, it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 475.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low-pressurewarning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installedon it. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give alow-pressure warning that is higher or lower thanthe proper warning level you would get withTPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 433.

442

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 349,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

Vehicles that have performance tiresP235/50R17 95V (front axle) and P255/45R17 98V(rear axle) are mounted on wheels with differentrim widths. The front axle tires are mountedon rims 7.5 inches (19.05 cm) wide and the rearaxle tires require wheels with a minimum rim widthof 8 inches (20.32 cm). The original equipmentwheels designed for P255/45R17 98V sizetires are etched with the words REAR ONLY.When replacing P255/45R17 98V size tires havethem mounted on wheels with a minimum width of8 inches (20.32 cm) and marked REAR ONLY.See Wheel Replacement on page 445.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.

Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic systemssuch as, anti-lock brakes, traction control, andelectronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 441 andAccessories and Modifications on page 363 foradditional information.

443

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conform tofederal safety requirements and additional GeneralMotors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

444

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

445

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way, youwill be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 464 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

446

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P255/45R17,P255/45R18, P275/40R19, or 255/45ZR18size tires, do not use tire chains, as thereis not enough clearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension, orother vehicle parts. The area damaged bythe tire chains could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle and you or othersmay be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only ifits manufacturer recommends it for useon your vehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions.



To help avoid damage to your vehicle,drive slowly, readjust, or remove thedevice if it is contacting your vehicle, anddo not spin your vehicle’s wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the rear tires only.

Notice: If your vehicle has P235/50R17 95Ssize tires, use tire chains only where legal andonly when you must. Use only SAE ClassS-type chains that are the proper size for yourtires. Install them on the rear tires andtighten them as tightly as possible with theends securely fastened. Drive slowly and followthe chain manufacturer’s instructions. If youcan hear the chains contacting your vehicle,stop and retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning the wheels with chains onwill damage your vehicle.

447

Lifting Your Vehicle (STS-V)

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overyou or other people. You and they couldbe badly injured. Find a level place to liftyour vehicle. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Hold the brake pedal down with yourright foot.

2. Move the shift lever in PARK (P) bypressing the button on the front ofthe shift lever while pushing the leverall the way toward the front of thevehicle. Release the button.

3. With your right foot still holding thebrake pedal down, set the parkingbrake with your left foot.

4. Turn off the engine.



To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you can put blocks in front ofand behind the wheels. Also, see ShiftingInto Park (P) on page 122 and ParkingBrake on page 121 for additionalinformation.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack, you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

448

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to place the jack in theproper location before raising the vehicle.

If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, followthe instructions that came with the jack, andbe sure to use the correct lifting points to avoiddamaging your vehicle.

Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costly repairsnot covered by your warranty. To lift yourvehicle properly, follow the advice in this part.

To help prevent vehicle damage:• Be sure the jack you are using meets the

weight standards for your vehicle and isin good working order.

• Be sure to place a block or pad betweenthe jack and the vehicle.

• Make sure the jack you are using onlycontacts the jacking location lift points andis not leaning on any other vehiclecomponents such as the rocker panels, thefloor pan, or the stone guard moldings.

• Lift only in the areas shown in the followingpictures.

449

Lifting From the FrontThe front lifting points can be accessed fromeither side of your vehicle, behind the front tires.

1. Locate the front lifting points using thediagram above. The front lifting locationis about 15 inches (37 cm) from the rear edgeof the front wheel well.

2. Be sure to place a block or pad between thejack and the vehicle.

3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure thejack is centered on the front lifting point.

Lifting From the RearThe rear lifting points can be accessed from eitherside of your vehicle, in front of the rear tires.

1. Locate the rear lifting points using thediagram above. The rear lifting locationis about 7 inches (17 cm) from the front edgeof the rear wheel well.

2. Be sure to place a block or pad between thejack and the vehicle.

3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure thejack is centered on the rear lifting point.

See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 364.

450

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your tiresproperly. See Tires on page 421. If air goes out ofa tire, It is much more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have a blowout, here are afew tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steeringwheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position,and then gently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowout,remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, and your vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on page 464.This information shows you how to use yourvehicle’s tire changing equipment and howto change a flat tire safely.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If your vehicle has 255/45ZR18 size tires, there isno spare tire, jack, or tire changing equipment.A tire inflator kit, included with your vehicle, maybe used to seal small punctures in the treadarea of the tire. See Tire Inflator Kit on page 452.

451

Run-Flat Tires (STS-V)If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no sparetire and no tire changing equipment. Run-flattires can operate effectively with no air pressurefor a limited distance and speed. These tiresperform so well without any air pressure that a TirePressure Monitor (TPM) is used to alert youwhen there is a low tire condition.

{CAUTION:

When the low tire warning light isdisplayed on the instrument panel cluster,your vehicle’s handling capabilities will bereduced during severe maneuvers. If youdrive too fast, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. You or others could beinjured. Do not drive over 55 mph(90 km/h) when the low tire warning lightis displayed. Drive cautiously and checkyour tire pressures as soon as you can.

See Run-Flat Tires (STS-V) on page 429 and TirePressure Monitor System on page 433, foradditional information.

{CAUTION:

Special tools and procedures are requiredto service a run-flat tire. If these specialtools and procedures are not used you orothers could be injured and your vehiclecould be damaged. Always be sure theproper tools and procedures, as describedin the service manual, are used.

To order a service manual see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 543.

Tire Inflator KitYour vehicle has a tire inflator kit. There is no jackor spare tire. The kit uses a liquid tire sealantand air at the same time to seal small puncturesin the tread area of the tire. Be sure to readand follow all of the tire inflator kit instructions.

452

The kit includes the following:

A. Air CompressorB. Tire Sealant CanisterC. Air Compressor

Accessory PlugD. On/Off Switch

E. Air Pressure GageF. Air Compressor

Inflator HoseG. Sealant

Filling Hose

If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a nailor other similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit maybe used to temporarily repair the damaged tire.

After temporarily repairing the tire inflator kit,it is recommended to take your vehicle toan authorized GM dealer within 100 miles(161 kilometers) of driving to have the tireinspected and repaired. If the sealant isnot removed from the tire within 100 miles(161 kilometers) of driving, it is more likely that thetire may get damaged and have to be replaced.

453

Accessing the Tire Inflator KitTo access the tire inflator kit, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 101for more information.

2. Locate the tire inflator kit on the driver’s side ofthe vehicle, near the back corner of the trunk.

3. Remove the tireinflator kit strapby squeezing thetwo tabs of the quickrelease buckle.

4. Remove the inflator kit from its foam container.

454

Tire SealantThe kit contains a liquid sealant that when injectedinto a flat tire, may temporarily repair nail holesor cuts in the tread area of the tire. The tire sealantcannot repair tire damage caused while drivingon a flat tire or a tire that has had a “blow out” ora tire that has punctures in the sidewall areas.The tire sealant solution is to be used for a singletire and can only be used once.

Check the tire sealant expiration date on thesealant canister. The sealant may not beas effective beyond the expiration date. If needed,see your GM dealer for a replacement canister.

Using the Tire Inflator KitTo use the tire inflator kit, do the following:

1. Place the inflator kit on the ground and unwrapthe sealant filling hose from the compressor.

2. Remove the air compressor accessory plugfrom the unit. To do this, pull the top portionof the wrapped cord out first, then the bottom,and then unsnap the plug. Do not insert theplug into an accessory outlet yet.

3. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tireby turning it counterclockwise.If an object, such as a nail, has penetratedthe tire, do not remove it.

455

4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tirevalve stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.Make sure the inflator kit on/off switch (B) is inthe O (off) position.

5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C)into an accessory power outlet in the vehicle.See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 228for more information.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine in a closed-in place orwith the climate control system off cancause deadly carbon monoxide (CO). SeeEngine Exhaust on page 125.

6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine onpage 113 for more information. The vehiclemust be running while using the aircompressor.

456

{CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can make itexplode, and you or others could beinjured. Be sure to read the inflatorinstructions, and inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do not exceed36 psi (248 kPa).

7. Move the inflator kit switch to the I (on)position.The inflator kit will force sealant and air intothe tire. Sealant may leak from the puncturehole until the vehicle is driven and thehole has sealed.

8. Make sure there is a proper connectionbetween the tire valve stem and thesealant filling hose by looking at the airpressure gage. If there is not a pressurereading while the compressor is running, theconnection between the inflator kit andthe tire is bad.Check the attachment between the sealantfilling hose and the tire valve stem.

457

9. Inflate the tire up to the recommendedinflation pressure, found on the Tire andLoading Information label located onthe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar) below thevehicle’s door latch, using the air pressuregage on the top of the unit.The pressure gage reading is slightly highwhile the compressor is on. Turn thecompressor off to get an accurate pressurereading.

Notice: If the recommended pressure cannotbe reached after 15 minutes, the vehicleshould not be driven farther. Damage to thetire is severe and the sealant will not beeffective. Remove the air compressor plugfrom the accessory power outlet and unscrewthe inflating hose from the tire valve. SeeRoadside Service on page 531.

10. Move the inflator kit switch to the O (off)position once the correct tire pressure isobtained.

11. Turn off the engine.

12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plugfrom the accessory power outlet in thevehicle.

13. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from thetire valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise,and replace the tire valve stem cap.Be careful when handling the tire inflatorcomponents as they may be hot after usage.

14. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the aircompressor channel to stow it in its originallocation.

15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug backin the air compressor. To do this, wrap the aircompressor accessory plug, snap in theplug, and then push in the bottom and thenthe top of the wrapped air compressoraccessory plug.

458

16. If the flat tire wasable to inflate to therecommendedinflation pressure,remove themaximum speedlabel from thesealant canister.

Place it in a highly visible location such as theinside of the upper left corner of thewindshield or to the face of the radio/clock.The maximum speed label reminds youto drive cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph(90 km/h) until you have the damaged tireinspected and repaired.

{CAUTION:

Storing the tire inflator kit or otherequipment in the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could cause injury. In asudden stop or collision, loose equipmentcould strike someone. Store the tireinflator kit in the proper place.

17. Return the equipment to the proper storagelocation in the trunk of your vehicle. You mayneed to loosen the retention strap to wrapit around the inflator kit and foam container. Todo this, pull apart the strap and loosen thestrap at the quick release buckle. Then snapthe buckle together, pull the strap tight,and secure the loose end of the strap bymating the ends.

459

18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km)to distribute the sealant evenly in the tire.Stop at a safe location and check thetire pressure, refer to Steps 1 through 8 under“Using the Air Compressor without Sealant”next in this section. If the tire pressurehas fallen more then 10 psi (68 kPa), belowthe recommended inflation pressure, stopdriving the vehicle. The tire is too damaged forthe sealant to work. See Roadside Serviceon page 531.If the tire pressure has not dropped more than10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommendedinflation pressure, you can inflate the tire backup to the recommended inflation pressure.

19. Dispose of the sealant canister at a local GMdealer or in accordance with your local statecodes and practices.After using the sealant canister, replace it witha new canister from a GM dealer.

20. After temporarily repairing a tire with theemergency flat tire repair kit, take yourvehicle to an authorized GM dealer to havethe tire inspected and repaired.

Using the Air Compressor withoutSealantTo use the air compressor by itself to inflate a tire,do the following:

1. Remove the air compressor accessory plugfrom the air compressor.

2. Unlock the air compressor hose from thesealant canister by pulling up on the lever.

3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from thesealant canister.

460

4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto thetire valve stem and push the lever down tosecure in place.

5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug intoan accessory power outlet in the vehicle. SeeAccessory Power Outlet(s) on page 228 formore information.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine in a closed-in place orwith the climate control system off cancause deadly carbon monoxide (CO). SeeEngine Exhaust on page 125.

6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine onpage 113 for more information. The vehiclemust be running while using the aircompressor.

{CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can make itexplode, and you or others could beinjured. Be sure to read the inflatorinstructions, and inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do not exceed36 psi (248 kPa).

7. Move the inflator kit switch to the I (on)position.

8. Make sure there is a proper connectionbetween the tire valve stem and the aircompressor hose by looking at the airpressure gage. If there is not a pressurereading while the compressor is running, theconnection between the inflator kit andthe tire is bad.Check the attachment between the aircompressor hose and the tire valve stem.

461

9. Inflate the tire up to the recommendedinflation pressure using the air pressure gageon the top of the unit.

10. Turn off the air compressor by moving theswitch to the O (off) position.

{CAUTION:

Storing the tire inflator kit or otherequipment in the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could cause injury. In asudden stop or collision, loose equipmentcould strike someone. Store the tireinflator kit in the proper place.

11. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose andwrap the hose in the bottom of the inflator kit.

12. Place the equipment in the original location inthe trunk of your vehicle.

Removal and Installation of the SealantCanisterTo remove the sealant canister, do the following:

1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose fromthe sealant canister by pulling the lever up.

2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hosefrom the sealant canister.

3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from thecompressor.

462

4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator fillinghose is aligned with the slot in thecompressor.

5. Lift the sealant canister from the compressorand replace with a new sealant canister. Seeyour GM dealer for more information.

To install a new sealant canister, do the following:

1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot inthe air compressor.

2. Push the sealant canister down and turn itclockwise.

3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the aircompressor channel to stow it in its originallocation.

4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto thesealant canister inlet and push the lever down.

463

Changing a Flat TireIf you have an STS-V model, there is no spare tireand no tire changing equipment. Your vehicle isequipped with run-flat tires. See Run-FlatTires (STS-V) on page 429 for more information. Ifyou have an STS model, your vehicle may beequipped with a tire inflator kit. See Tire Inflator Kiton page 452 for more information. If your vehicleis not equipped with a tire inflator kit, followthe directions for changing a flat tire in this section.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 180 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

464

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is located in thetrunk. To gain access to the compact spare tireand jacking equipment, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 101 formore information.

2. Remove the compact spare tire cover.

3. Turn the nut holding the jack packagecontainer counterclockwise and removeit. Then remove the jack and wheel wrench.

465

4. Remove the compact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire on page 475 for more informationabout the compact spare tire.

The tools you will be using include the jack (A)and the wheel wrench (B).

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do not removethem yet, using the wheel wrench. Turn thehandle about 180 degrees, then flip the handleback to the starting position. This avoidstaking the wrench off the lug nut for each turn.

466

2. Find the vehicle’s jacking location using thediagram above and corresponding hoistingnotches located in the plastic molding on thevehicle’s frame. The notches in the plasticmolding are marked with a triangle shape tohelp you find them.

3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift head intothe proper location before raising thevehicle.

467

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

Notice: If you position the jack under therocker molding and attempt to raise thevehicle, you could break the molding and/orcause other damage to your vehicle. Alwaysposition the jack so that when the jack head israised, it will fit firmly in the notch locatedinboard from the rocker molding.

4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the jack lift head until the jack fitsunder the vehicle.

468

5. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise until the slots in the jack head fitinto the metal flange located behind thetriangle on the plastic molding as shown.

6. Put the compact spare tire near you.

7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground for the compact spare tire tofit under the vehicle.

469

8. Remove all thewheel nuts and takeoff the flat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time. Thewheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,



remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

470

9. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces, andspare wheel.

10. Install the spare tire.

11. Put the wheel nuts back on with the roundedend of the nuts toward the wheel.

12. Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwisewith your hand until the wheel is held againstthe hub.

13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheelwrench counterclockwise. Lower the jackcompletely.

471

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 498for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 498 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

14. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compactspare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel coverin the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired orreplaced.

472

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

Full-Size Tire and ToolsAfter you have put the compact spare tire on yourvehicle, you will need to do the following tostore the flat tire in your trunk.

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 101.

2. Store the jack and wheel wrench in the jackcontainer in the trunk.When storing the jack, in the container, itmust be raised until the screw end is flush withthe edge of the jack.

3. Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk aspossible.

The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can.

473

Compact Spare Tire and ToolsUse the following diagram as a guide for storingthe compact spare tire and tools in the trunk:

A. Compact Spare TireCover

B. Plastic Wing NutC. RetainerD. Jack Container

Package (WithWheel Wrenchand Jack)

E. Compact SpareTire

F. Foam SupportG. Bolt

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 101.

2. Make sure the foam support (F) is in place inthe trunk area.

3. Reinstall the compact spare tire (E) makingsure to line up the wheel center hole with thebolt (G) and place on the compartment floor.

4. Insert the jack container (J) with wheelwrench (H) and jack (I) into the center ofthe compact spare tire making sure to line upthe wheel nut hole with the bolt (G) on thecompartment floor.

5. Secure the tire and wheel with the retainer (C)and wing nut (B).

6. Reinstall the compact spare tire cover (A).

474

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. Itshould be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,you should stop as soon as possible and makesure the spare tire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to perform well at speedsup to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your tripand have the full-size tire repaired or replacedwhere you want. You must calibrate the tireinflation monitor system after installing or removingthe compact spare. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 433. The system may notwork correctly when the compact spare is installedon the vehicle. Of course, it’s best to replacethe spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.The spare will last longer and be in good shapein case you need it again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

475

Appearance CareCleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.

Remove any accidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, applycleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damage tothe integrated radio antenna and the rearwindow defogger. When cleaning the glass onyour vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

476

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

477

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

478

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Wood PanelsUse a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the woodimmediately with a clean cloth.

Speaker CoversVacuum around a speaker cover gently, so thatthe speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots withjust water and mild soap.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

479

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 516.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer.

See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials onpage 484. Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives.All cleaning agents should be flushed promptlyand not allowed to dry on the surface, or theycould stain. Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 480.

480

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 484.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

481

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

482

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

483

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description UsagePolishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Description Usage

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish EnhancerRemoves dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step. Nowiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot LifterQuickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

484

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code helps you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on your spare tire cover. It isvery helpful if you ever need to order parts. Thelabel has the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

485

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 78.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in thefuse block. An electrical overload will causethe lamps to turn off. If this happens, have yourheadlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by aninternal circuit breaker. If the wiper motoroverheats due to heavy snow, the wipers will stopuntil the motor cools and will then restart.

486

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows andpower seats. When the current load is tooheavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed orgoes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused byelectrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. Ifthe band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating. If a fuse shouldblow, see your dealer for service immediately.

If you ever have a problem on the roadand don’t have a spare fuse, you can borrowone that has the same amperage. Just pick somefeature of your vehicle that you can get alongwithout – like the radio or cigarette lighter – anduse its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replaceit as soon as you can.

The fuses are located in three fuse blocks.One is located in the engine compartment, on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle, and the othertwo are located under the rear seat on both thedriver’s and passenger’s side of the vehicle.

487

Underhood Fuse Block

488

The underhood fuse block is located in the front ofthe engine compartment on the passenger’sside of the vehicle. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 373 for more informationon location and removal procedure for the frontcompartment underhood sights shields.

To access the fuses, push in the tabs located oneach side of the fuse block cover, then lift thecover off.

Fuses UsageBLOWER Blower MotorR REAR Passenger’s Side Rear Fuse Block

I/P OUTLET Front Accessory Power OutletCCP Climate Control, Headlamp Leveling

PRE 02/CAMOxygen Sensor, Variable Intake (V6),Purge Solenoid (V6), CamshaftPhasers (V6)

R REAR Passenger’s Side Rear Fuse BlockWPR SW Wiper/Washer Switch

FOG LAMP Fog LampsOUTLET Rear Accessory Power Outlet

EVEN COILS Even Ignition Coils, Even FuelInjectors

Fuses UsageL REAR Driver’s Side Rear Fuse Block

WPR MOD Wiper ModulePOST 02 Oxygen Sensor

COMP CLTCH Air Conditioner Compressor ClutchSTARTER Starter Solenoid

ABS Anti-lock Brake PumpL REAR Driver’s Side Rear Fuse Block

RAIN SSR Rain Sensor, Headlamp Washer,Tire Pressure Monitor

CCP Climate ControlSMT BM-OPT IntelliBeam™ Relay (If Equipped)

EXT LIGHTS Low Beam Relay, High Beam Relay,Park Lamp Relay

VOLT CHECK Instrument Panel Module

ECM/TCM

Engine Control Module (ECM),Transmission Control Module (TCM),Easy Key Module, Instrument PanelCluster

SPARE SpareSPARE Spare

LT PARK Driver’s Side Park Lamp, Driver’sSide Taillamp

489

Fuses Usage

LIC/DIMMING License Plate, InstrumentPanel Dimming

IPM/ALDL Instrument Panel Module AssemblyLine Data Link Connector

HUD Heads-Up Display, Column LockModule, Steering Column Switch

V8 ECM V8 Engine Control Module (ECM),Evap. Solenoid, Vacuum Bypass

ABS Anti-lock Brake ControllerSTR RLY Starter Relay

WASHNOZ/AQS

Heated Washer Nozzles, AirQuality Sensor

ODD COILS Odd Ignition Coils, OddFuel Injectors

TCM IPC Transmission Control Module (TCM),Instrument Panel, Engine Control

SPARE SpareMAF Mass Air Flow Sensor (V6)

HIGH FAN Cooling Fan - High SpeedLOW FAN Cooling Fan - Low Speed

RT PARK Passenger’s Side Park Lamp,Right Taillamp

Fuses UsageHORN Horn

LT HI BEAM Driver’s Side Headlamp High-BeamLT LOW BEAM Driver’s Side Headlamp Low-Beam

RT LOW BEAM Passenger’s Side HeadlampLow-Beam

RT HI BEAM Right Headlamp High-Beam

HFV6 ECMHigh Feature V6 Engine ControlModule (ECM), Mass Air FlowSensor (MAF) (V8)

Relays UsageHDLP WASH

RELAYJUMPER -OPT

Headlamp Washer

STARTERRELAY MINI Starter

SPARE SpareFOG LAMP

RELAY MICRO Fog Lamps

CMP CLURELAY MICRO

Air Conditioning CompressorClutch

490

Relays UsageBLOWER

RELAY MINI Front Blower Motor

POWERTRAINRELAY MICRO Engine Controls

RUN/CRANKRELAY MICRO

Ignition 1, Starter, Washer Nozzle,Air Quality, Anti-lock Brake System,Climate Control Panel, TransmissionControl Module, Instrument PanelCluster, Mass Airflow Sensor,Engine Control Module

LOW SPEEDFAN RELAY

MINICooling Fan Low Speed

ACCESSORYRELAY MINI

Ignition 3, Rain Sensor, HeadlampWasher, Windshield Wiper/WasherModule

PARK LAMPRELAY MICRO

Parking Lamps, Instrument PanelDimming, Rear License Plate Lamps

HIGH BEAMRELAY MICRO Headlamp High-Beam

LOW BEAMRELAY/HIDMINI-OPT

Low-Beam/High Intensity Discharge

Relays UsageHIGH SPEEDFAN RELAY

MINICooling Fan High Speed

S/P FANRELAY MINI Cooling Fan Series/Parallel

HORN RELAYMICRO Horn

SPARE Spare

CircuitBreakers

Usage

HDLP WASHC/B -OPT Headlamp Washer (If Equipped)

HarnessConnection

Usage

ENG W/H Engine Harness ConnectionBODY W/H Body Harness ConnectionBODY W/H Body Harness Connection

491

Rear Underseat Fuse Block

Removing the Rear Seat Cushion

Notice: If you touch the exposed wires withthe metal on the seat cushion, you could causea short that could damage the battery and orwires. Avoid contact between the rear seat andthe fuse center whenever you remove orreinstall the rear seat. Do not remove coversfrom any of the covered parts, and do not storeanything under the seats.

To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:

1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to releasethe front hooks.

2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the frontof the vehicle.

To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:

492

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly routedthrough the seat cushion or is twisted willnot provide the protection needed in acrash. If the safety belt has not beenrouted through the seat cushion at all, itwill not be there to work for the nextpassenger. The person sitting in thatposition could be badly injured. Afterreinstalling the seat cushion, alwayscheck to be sure that the safety belts areproperly routed and are not twisted.

1. Buckle the center passenger position safetybelt, then route the safety belts through theproper slots in the seat cushion. Do not let thesafety belts get twisted.

2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under theseatback so the rear-locating guides hook intothe wire loops on the back frame.

3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearwardand then press down on the seat cushion untilthe spring locks on both ends engage.

4. Check to make sure the safety belts areproperly routed and that no portion of anysafety belt is trapped under the seat.Also make sure the seat cushion is secured.

Rear Underseat Fuse Block

There is a fuse block located under the rear seaton the driver’s side and passenger’s side ofthe vehicle. The rear seat cushion must beremoved to access the fuse blocks. See“Removing the Rear Seat Cushion” listedpreviously in this section.

To access the fuses, push in the two tabs, then liftthe cover off.

493

Driver’s Side

Your vehicle may not have all the fuses listed below.

Fuses UsageAMP Amplifier

INTERCOOLERPUMP (OPT) Intercooler Pump (Option)

THEFT/SHIFTER

Theft Sensors, Auto Shifter, PowerSounder

MR-RTDMOD (OPT)

Magnetic Ride Control Module(Option)

REAR DR MOD Rear Door ModulesELC SOL

(OPT)Automatic Level Control, ExhaustSolenoid (Option)

DRIVER DRMOD

Driver Door Module, Front DoorSubWoofers (Option)

TV/VICS Infotainment (Export Only)

Fuses UsageREAR HTD

SEATS Rear Heated Seats

SPARE SpareSPARE Spare

IGN3 Front Passenger Heated Seat, AutoShifter, Occupant Protection

RR SHLFSPEAKER Rear Shelf Speaker (Option)

DPM Memory Seat, LumbarTRUNK DR

VALETTrunk Release, Valet LockoutSwitch

REVERSELAMP

Reverse Lamps, Rear Parking Aid,Inside Rearview Mirror

494

Fuses UsageAIR BAG Airbag

POSITIONLAMPS (OPT) Rear Taillamps

ELC RELAY(OPT) Automatic Level Control (Option)

Relays UsageINTERCOOLERPUMP MICRO

(OPT)Intercooler Pump (Option)

ELC RELAYMINI (OPT)

Automatic Level Control Compressor(Option)

L POSITIONRELAY MICRO

Left Rear Taillamp, Position Lamps(Option)

TRUNK DRREL RELAY

MICROTrunk Release Motor

REV LAMPRELAY MICRO

Reverse Lamps, Rear Parking Aid,Inside Rearview Mirror

Relays UsageR POSITION

RELAY MICRORight Rear Taillamp, Position Lamps(Option)

RUN RELAYMICRO Ignition 3

STNDBY LAMPRLY MICRO

(OPT)

Rear Taillamps, Position Lamps(Option)

CircuitBreakers

Usage

SEATS C/B Power Seat

Diodes UsageSPARE Spare

JointConnector

Usage

JOINTCONNECTOR Splice Pack (Green)

495

Passenger’s Side

Fuses UsageSPARE Spare

CANISTERVENT Canister Vent Solenoid

RT TURN-RIM Right Turn SignalSUNROOF

(OPT) Sunroof Module (Option)

STOP LAMPS StoplampsFUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

RF HTDST/S-BAND

Front Passenger Heated Seat,S-Band™ Antenna

RADIO/ONSTAR Radio/OnStar®

AIR BAG Airbags

Fuses UsageRIM Battery to Rear Integration Module

RUN/CRANK Ignition 1, Fog Lamps, CompressorClutch, Engine Run/Crank Relays

HTD STG/CLM Heated Steering Wheel, ColumnLock Module

REAR DEFOG Rear DefoggerINTERIOR

LAMP Interior Lamps

PSG DR MOD Front Passenger Door ModuleLT TURN-RIM Left Turn Signal

REAR FOGLAMP (OPT) Rear Fog Lamps (Option)

496

Fuses UsageAFTERBOIL/DIFF PUMP

(OPT)

After Boil, Rear DifferentialCooling Pump

RIM Ignition to Rear Integration Module

Relays UsageSPARE Spare

REAR DEFOGRELAY MINI Rear Defog

FUEL PUMPRELAY MICRO Fuel Pump

REAR FOGLAMP RLY

MICRO (OPT)Rear Fog Lamps (Option)

STOP LAMPRELAY MICRO Stoplamps

INT LAMPRELAY MICRO Interior Lamps

RUN/CRANKRELAY MICRO Ignition 1

AFTERBOIL/DIFF PUMP

RELAYMICRO (OPT)

After Boil, Rear DifferentialCooling Pump (Option)

CircuitBreakers

Usage

WINDOWMTRS C/B

Power Window MotorsCircuit Breaker

Diodes UsageTRUNK DIODE Trunk Release

JointConnector

Usage

JOINTCONNECTOR Splice Pack (Blue)

497

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 516 for more information.

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Cooling System

3.6L V6 11.7 qt 11.1 L

4.4L V8 (V-Series) 13.4 qt 12.7 L

4.6L V8 12.5 qt 11.8 L

Intercooler System 4.4L Engine 2.6 qt 2.5 L

Brake Fluid Capacities 1.1 qt 1.0 L

Engine Oil with Filter

3.6L V6 6.0 qt 5.7 L

4.4L V8 (V-Series) 9.0 qt 8.5 L

4.6L V8 8.0 qt 7.6 L

Fuel Tank 17.5 gal 66.2 L

498

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Transmission (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)

5-Speed Automatic 7.4 qt 7.0 L

6-Speed Automatic 7.3 qt 6.9 L

6-Speed Automatic (V-Series) 6.5 qt 6.2 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in thismanual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L DOHC V6 7 Automatic 0.044 inches (1.11 mm)

4.4L DOHC V8 (V-Series) D Automatic 0.040 inches (1.02 mm)

4.6L DOHC V8 A Automatic 0.050 inches (1.27 mm)

STS-V Engine DataEngine Horsepower Torque Displacement Compression Ratio

4.4L V8 (V-Series) 469hp (350 kW)@ 6400 rpm

439 lb ft (595 Nm)@ 3800 rpm 4.4L 9.0:1

499

✍ NOTES

500

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 502Introduction ............................................... 502Maintenance Requirements ........................ 502Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 503Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 503Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 505Additional Required Services ..................... 508Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 510Owner Checks and Services ..................... 512

At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 513At Least Once a Month ............................. 513At Least Once a Year ............................... 514Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 516Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ................................. 518Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 519Maintenance Record .................................. 521

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

501

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance might not be coveredby warranty.

502

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may needmore frequent checks and replacements. So pleaseread the following and note how you drive. If youhave any questions on how to keep your vehicle ingood condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.

503

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 349.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 365.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 505 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 508 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 510 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehiclecan be dangerous. In trying to do somejobs, you can be seriously injured. Do yourown maintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper toolsand equipment for the job. If you have anydoubt, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer tohave a qualified technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should have yourGM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

504

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 543.

Owner Checks and Services on page 512 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 516 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 518.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagein the Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, itmeans that service is required for your vehicle.Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions, theengine oil life system may not indicate that vehicleservice is necessary for over a year. However, theengine oil and filter must be changed at least oncea year and at this time the system must be reset.Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trainedservice technicians who will perform this work usinggenuine GM parts and reset the system.

505

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 383 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageappears, certain services, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required services are describedin the following for “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommendedthat your first service be Maintenance I, yoursecond service be Maintenance II, and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases,Maintenance II may be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes onwithin 10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.

506

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 380. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 383. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 386. See footnote (m). •

Check tires for inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 421. If tirerotation is recommended for your vehicle, rotate tires. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 438 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 513.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels. If you have the4.4L V8 supercharged engine, check intercooler fluid level. Add fluid asneeded.

• •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g). •

507

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage orleaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 386. • •

4.4L Supercharged Engine:Supercharger service. See footnote (o). • • • • • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (severe service).See footnote (h).

• • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (normal service). •

For all-wheel-drive vehicles usedfor trailer towing: Change transfercase fluid.

• • •

508

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Throttle body service. An EmissionControl Service. See footnotes † and (l). • • • • • •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service.See footnote (j).

•

4.4L Supercharged Engine: Intercoolersystem service (or every five years,whichever occurs first).See footnote (p).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt. AnEmission Control Service.See footnote (n).

•

If using DOT-4 brake fluid, changebrake fluid at a regular maintenanceservice every two years.See footnote (i).

509

Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency orthe California Air Resources Board has determinedthat the failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emission warranty or limitrecall liability prior to the completion of thevehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that allrecommended maintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts. Ifyou see anything that might keep a safety beltsystem from doing its job, have it repaired. Haveany torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also lookfor any opened or broken airbag coverings, andhave them repaired or replaced. The airbag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.

510

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate allhinges and latches, including those for the hood,rear compartment, glove box door, and consoledoor. More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment.Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth will make them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak.

(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as limousine service.− Uses such as high performance operation.

(i) If using DOT-4 brake fluid only: Drain, flush,and refill brake hydraulic system at a regularmaintenance service (I or II) every two years. Thisservice can be complex; you should have yourdealer perform this service. See Brakes onpage 405.

(j) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 389 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(l) Inspect throttle body bore and valve plates fordeposits. Open the throttle valve and inspectall surfaces. Clean as required.

(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

511

(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

(o) Drain, flush, and refill intercooler system. Thisservice can be complex; you should have yourdealer perform this service. See Engine Coolant onpage 389

(p) For supercharged engines only: Have yourdealer check the supercharger oil level andadd the proper supercharger oil as needed(or every 36 months, whichever occurs first).See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 516

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle. YourGM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you withthese checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 516.

512

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 380 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check the engine oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.Failure to keep the engine oil at the properlevel can cause damage to the engine notcovered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 389 for further details.

Intercooler Coolant Level Check(4.4L Supercharged Engine)Check the coolant level and add DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 389 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make surethey are inflated to the correct pressures. Do notforget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 431. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 464.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation is recommended if your vehicle hasthe same size tires at all four wheel positionsand may be required for high mileage highwaydrivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System servicenotification. Check the tires for wear and, ifnecessary, rotate the tires. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 438.

513

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 121.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 121.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off and without applying theregular brake, try to move the shift lever outof PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shiftlever moves out of PARK (P), contact yourGM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

514

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

515

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires a specialengine oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard can be identified assynthetic, and should also beidentified with the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) Certifiedfor Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. However, not all syntheticAPI oils with the starburst symbolwill meet this GM standard. Youshould look for and use only oil thatmeets GM Standard GM4718M. GMGoodwrench® oil meets all therequirements for your vehicle. Forthe proper viscosity, see Engine Oilon page 380.

Engine CoolingSystem

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 389.

Usage Fluid/LubricantIntercooler

System(4.4L V8

Superchargedengine)

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Supercharger

Supercharger Oil(GM Part No. U.S. 12345982,in Canada 10953513). SeeSupercharger Oil on page 385

516

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Rear Axle

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Front Axle(All-Wheel

Drive)

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Transfer Case(All-Wheel

Drive)

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,in Canada 88861801).

Usage Fluid/LubricantHood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

517

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourGM dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part NumberEngine Air Cleaner/Filter Element

3.6L V6 and 4.6L V8 25735595 A2944C4.4L V8 (V-Series) 15813300 A3078C

Engine Oil Filter3.6L V6 25177917 PF21294.4L V8 (V-Series) 890175271 PF261

4.6L V8 89017342 PF61Passenger Compartment Air Filter 88957450 CF13CSpark Plugs

3.6L V6 12597464 41-9904.4L V8 (V-Series) 12592619 41-9914.6L V8 12571535 41-987

Windshield Wiper BladeDriver’s Side – 22 inches (56.5 cm) 88958361 —Passenger’s Side – 21 inches (53.0 cm) 88958359 —

1 Notice: If your vehicle is an STS-V model, the engine uses a special oil filter. The use of any other engine oil filtercould lead to filter failure and result in severe engine damage. Damage caused by use of the wrong engine oil filterwould not be covered by your new vehicle warranty.

518

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.6L V6 Engine

4.4L V8 Engine

519

4.6L V8 Engine

520

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 502.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 512 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

521

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



522




523




524

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 526Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 526Online Owner Center ................................. 528Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users ........................................... 529Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 529GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 530Roadside Service ...................................... 531Courtesy Transportation ............................. 534Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 536Collision Damage Repair ........................... 538

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 542Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 542Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 542Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 542Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 543

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

525

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If thematter has already been reviewed with the sales,service or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, contact the Cadillac CustomerAssistance Center, 24 hours a day, by calling1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact the CanadianCadillac Customer Communication Centre bycalling 1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).This is available from the vehicle registrationor title, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Cadillac, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

526

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your new vehicle.However, if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, you should file with the BBB Auto LineProgram to enforce any additional rights youmay have. Canadian owners refer to yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Informationbooklet for information on the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Programusing the toll-free telephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

527

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

528

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac bydialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesCadillac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Cadillac, refer tothe addresses below.

United States — Customer AssistanceCadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

www.Cadillac.com1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCanadian Cadillac Customer CommunicationCentre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-888-446-20001-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112

529

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

530

Roadside ServiceIn the United States or Canada, call1-800-882-1112. Service is available 24 hours aday, 365 days a year.

Who Is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the UnitedStates during the Bumper-to-Bumper warrantyperiod and in Canada, during the Base Warrantycoverage period of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, up to a maximum coverage of $100.These services are provided at a nominal chargeif the Cadillac is no longer covered by thewarranties listed previously. Roadside Service isavailable only in the United States and Canada.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™Roadside Service provides several CadillacOwner Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughoutyour Cadillac Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).

Emergency Road Service is performed on site forthe following situations:

• Towing Service: Emergency towing from apublic roadway or highway to the nearestdealership for warranty service or in the eventof a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Battery Jump Starting: No-start occurrenceswhich require a battery jump start will becovered at no charge.

531

• Lock Out Assistance: To ensure security,the driver must present the vehicle registrationand personal ID before lock-out service isprovided. Lock-out service will be covered atno charge if you are unable to gain entryinto your vehicle. If your vehicle will not start,Roadside Service will arrange to haveyour vehicle towed to the nearest authorizeddealership. In the United States, replacementkeys made at the customer’s expense willbe delivered within 10 miles.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the United States and10 litres in Canada).

• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only):Installation of your spare tire, in goodcondition, will be covered at no charge. Thecustomer is responsible for the repair orreplacement of the tire if not covered by awarrantable failure.

• Trip Interruption: If your trip is interrupted dueto a warranty failure, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km) warranty period.Items covered are hotel, meals, and rental car.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Cadillac

Roadside Service will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800. Wewill make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

• Alternative Service: There may be times whenRoadside Service cannot provide timelyassistance. Your advisor may authorize you tosecure local emergency road service, and youwill be reimbursed up to $100 upon submissionof the original receipt to Cadillac RoadsideService®.

532

Cadillac Technician Roadside Service(U.S. only)Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is morethan an auto club or towing service. It providesevery Cadillac owner in the United States with theadvantage of contacting a Cadillac advisor and,where available, a Cadillac trained dealertechnician who can provide on-site service.

A dealer technician will travel to your locationwithin a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a participatingCadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, wewill arrange to have your car towed to the nearestCadillac dealership. Each technician travelswith a specially equipped service vehicle completewith the necessary Cadillac parts and toolsrequired to handle most roadside repairs.

Calling for AssistanceFor prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideService Representative:

• A description of the problem

• Name, home address, home telephonenumber

• Location of your Cadillac and number you arecalling from

• The model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), odometer reading, and dateof delivery

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. In the United States orCanada, customers call Roadside Service:1-800-882-1112. Any customer who has access toa (TTY) or a conventional teletypewriter cancommunicate with Cadillac by dialing from theUnited States or Canada 1-888-889-2438 — daily,24 hours.

533

Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Service is not part of or included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Cadillac General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Service program atany time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Servicecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program isoffered to customers in conjunction with theBumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportationoptions are available when warranty repairsare required. This will reduce your inconvenienceduring warranty repairs.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, youshould contact your dealer and request anappointment. By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

534

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide you with shuttleservice to get you to your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round trip shuttle service to adestination up to 10 miles (16 km) from thedealership.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires warranty repairs,reimbursement of public transportation expensesmay be available, for up to a maximum offive days. In addition, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative,reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses maybe available, up to a five-day maximum. Claimamounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for a warranty repair. Reimbursementwill be limited to a maximum amount per day andmust be supported by receipts. This requiresthat you sign and complete a rental agreement andmeet state, local and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also be responsible for taxes,levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rentalusage beyond the completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, butit is not part of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate booklet entitled Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information furnished witheach new vehicle provides detailed warrantycoverage information.

535

Courtesy Transportation is available only atparticipating dealers and all program options, suchas shuttle service, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact your dealer forspecific information about availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will be administeredby appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle Coverage period of theGeneral Motors of Canada New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, alternative transportation may beavailable under the Courtesy TransportationProgram. Please consult your dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, hasa number of sophisticated computer systems thatmonitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control componentsto optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations. Someinformation may be stored during regular operationsto facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; otherinformation is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly calledEvent Data Recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision.

536

If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,steering performance, including yaw rate, steeringwheel angle, and lateral acceleration, is alsorecorded. This information has been usedto improve vehicle crash performance and may beused to improve crash performance of futurevehicles and driving safety. Unlike the datarecorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and datacollection.

537

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle. Arecycled original equipment GM part, maybe an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s

originally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for your vehicle. As aresult, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by yourGM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyvehicle failure related to such parts are notcovered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have acollision repair center with GM-trained techniciansand state of the art equipment, or be able torecommend a collision repair center that hasGM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

538

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GMRoadside Assistance. See Roadside Serviceon page 531 for more information.

539

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. Ifthey ask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

540

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts.

Remember if your vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurancecoverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

541

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify us. Please call us at1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

542

In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000.Or, write:

Canadian Cadillac Customer CommunicationCentre, CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Limited1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unitrepair service procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to ProductService Bulletins can be obtained by contactingyour General Motors dealer or by calling1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483).

543

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The ownermanual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. at:www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

544

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 363Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 228Adaptive Cruise Control ............................... 197Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 79Additives, Fuel ............................................ 367Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 486Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 386Air Conditioning ........................................... 230Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 245Readiness Light ....................................... 244

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 536

Airbag System ............................................... 64Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 79How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 72Passenger Sensing System ....................... 74Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 78What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 71What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 72When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 70

Airbag System (cont.)Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 66

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 414All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System .................... 327Antenna, Diversity Antenna System ............. 314Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System .................................................... 314Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 321Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 249Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 482Care of Safety Belts ................................ 479Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 484Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 480Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 476Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 477Finish Care .............................................. 481Finish Damage ......................................... 483Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ............................................... 479Leather .................................................... 478Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 483Speaker Covers ....................................... 479Tires ........................................................ 483Underbody Maintenance ........................... 483

545

Appearance Care (cont.)Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 484Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 480Weatherstrips ........................................... 480Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 481Wood Panels ........................................... 479

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 229Audio System(s) .......................................... 280

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 310Care of Your CD Player ........................... 313Care of Your CDs .................................... 313Diversity Antenna System ......................... 314Navigation/Radio System, see

Navigation Manual ................................ 305Audio Systems

Radio Personalization ............................... 305Audio System(s)

Radio with CD ......................................... 282Setting the Time ...................................... 281Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 309Understanding Radio Reception ............... 312XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 314

Automatic TransmissionFluid ........................................................ 388Operation ................................................. 116

BBattery ........................................................ 408

Electric Power Management ..................... 221Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 219Inadvertent Power Saver .......................... 222Load Management ................................... 221

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 340Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 321Emergencies ............................................ 323Panic Assist ............................................. 327Parking .................................................... 121System Warning Light .............................. 248

Brakes ........................................................ 405Braking ....................................................... 320Braking in Emergencies ............................... 323Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 111Bulb Replacement ....................................... 417

Back-Up Lamps ....................................... 418Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 418High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting .... 418Replacement Bulbs .................................. 419

Buying New Tires ........................................ 441

546

CCalibration ............................................ 14, 128California Fuel ............................................. 366California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 363Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 498Carbon Monoxide .............. 101, 125, 344, 357Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 479Your CD Player ........................................ 313Your CDs ................................................. 313

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 297Center Console Storage Area ...................... 146Chains, Tire ................................................. 447Charging System Light ................................ 247Check

Engine Light ............................................ 252Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 372Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 484Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 44Infants and Young Children ........................ 40Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 50Older Children ........................................... 38Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position .......................................... 57

Child Restraints (cont.)Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ................................. 59Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 48

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 229Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 482Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 480Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 477Finish Care .............................................. 481Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 476Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 479Leather .................................................... 478Speaker Covers ....................................... 479Tires ........................................................ 483Underbody Maintenance ........................... 483Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 480Weatherstrips ........................................... 480Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 481Wood Panels ........................................... 479

Climate Control SystemAir Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 239Dual ......................................................... 230Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 237Rear ........................................................ 237

Clock .......................................................... 281

547

Collision Damage Repair ............................. 538Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 34Compact Spare Tire .................................... 475Compass .............................................. 14, 128Competitive Driving ..................................... 333Competitive Driving Mode ............................ 325Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 320Convenience Net ......................................... 146Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 251Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 251Heater, Engine ......................................... 115Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 393

Cooling System ........................................... 396Cruise Control ............................................. 193Cruise Control, Adaptive .............................. 197Cruise Control, Forward Collision

Alert (FAC) System .................................. 184Cruise Control Light .................................... 256Cupholder(s) ................................................ 146Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 534Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 529Customer Assistance Offices .................... 529Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 526

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 530Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 542Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 542Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 542Roadside Service ..................................... 531Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 543

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 216Defensive Driving ........................................ 316Disc, MP3 ................................................... 297Diversity Antenna System ............................ 314Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 364Door

Locks ......................................................... 98Power Door Locks ..................................... 99Programmable Automatic Door Locks ......... 99Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 100

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 21

548

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 258DIC Controls and Displays ....................... 258DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 264Other Messages ....................................... 279

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 333City .......................................................... 338Defensive ................................................. 316Drunken ................................................... 317Freeway ................................................... 339Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 342In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 335Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 349Winter ...................................................... 344

Dual Climate Control System ....................... 230

EElectric Power Management ........................ 221Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 486Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 487Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 486Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 487

Electrical System (cont.)Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 492Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 488Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 486

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 386Battery ..................................................... 408Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 252Coolant .................................................... 389Coolant Heater ......................................... 115Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 251Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 251Drive Belt Routing .................................... 519Engine Compartment Overview ................ 373Exhaust ................................................... 125Oil ........................................................... 380Oil Life System ........................................ 383Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 395Overheating ............................................. 393Starting .................................................... 113Supercharger Oil ...................................... 385

Entry Lighting .............................................. 220Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 536Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 37Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................... 219

549

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 386Finish Damage ............................................ 483Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 180Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 188Flat Tire ...................................................... 451Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 464Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 473Fluid

Automatic Transmission ............................ 388Power Steering ........................................ 403Windshield Washer .................................. 404

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 256Fog Lamps .................................................. 217Forward Collision Alert (FAC) System .......... 184Front Axle ................................................... 417Fuel ............................................................ 365

Additives .................................................. 367California Fuel .......................................... 366Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 371Filling Your Tank ...................................... 368Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 368Gage ....................................................... 257Gasoline Octane ...................................... 365Gasoline Specifications ............................ 366

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 487Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 492Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 488Windshield Wiper ..................................... 486

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 251Fuel ......................................................... 257Speedometer ........................................... 243Tachometer .............................................. 243

Garage Door Opener .......................... 135, 136Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 365Specifications ........................................... 366

Glove Box ................................................... 146GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 530

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 180Head Restraints ............................................ 13Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 486

550

Headlamps .................................................. 211Bulb Replacement .................................... 417Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 216Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 188Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 418High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting .... 418High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 183On Reminder ........................................... 216Washer .................................................... 192Wiper Activated ........................................ 215

Head-Up Display (HUD) .............................. 223Heated Seats ......................................... 10, 11Heated Steering Wheel ............................... 181Heater ......................................................... 230Highbeam On Light ..................................... 257High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 432Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 341Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 342Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 372Release ................................................... 372

Horn ............................................................ 180How to Use This Manual ................................ 3How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 20

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 111Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ................. 222Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 40Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 431Inflator Kit, Tire ........................................... 452Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 178Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 220Cluster ..................................................... 242

JJump Starting .............................................. 408

KKeyless Access System ................................. 87Keyless Access System, Operation ................ 88Keys ............................................................. 85

551

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 423Lamps

Battery Load Management ....................... 221Electric Power Management ..................... 221Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 219Fog .......................................................... 217Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .............. 222Reading ................................................... 221Twilight Sentinel® ..................................... 218

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 50

Lifting Your Vehicle, Tires ............................ 448Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 244Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 249Brake System Warning ............................. 248Charging System ..................................... 247Cruise Control .......................................... 256Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 251Fog Lamp ................................................ 256Highbeam On .......................................... 257Lights On Reminder ................................. 256Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ............. 249

Light (cont.)Malfunction Indicator ................................ 252Oil Pressure ............................................. 255Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 245Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 244Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 243Security ................................................... 256TCS Warning Light .................................. 250Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ... 250

LightingEntry ........................................................ 220Parade Dimming ...................................... 220

Limited-Slip Rear Axle ................................. 325Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 349Lockout Protection ....................................... 101Locks

Door .......................................................... 98Lockout Protection ................................... 101Power Door ............................................... 99Programmable Automatic Door Locks ......... 99Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 100

Loss of Control ........................................... 332Lumbar

Power Controls ............................................ 9

552

MMagnetic Ride Control ................................. 325Maintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 508At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 513At Least Once a Month ............................ 513At Least Once a Year .............................. 514Introduction .............................................. 502Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 510Maintenance Record ................................ 521Maintenance Requirements ...................... 502Normal Maintenance Replacement

Parts .................................................... 518Owner Checks and Services .................... 512Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 516Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 505Using ....................................................... 503Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 503

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 252Memory Mirrors ........................................... 169Memory Seat ............................................... 169Memory Steering Wheel Controls ................ 169Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 264

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Rearview ................... 127Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

Intellibeam™ and OnStar® .................... 127Automatic Dimming Rearview with

OnStar® ................................................ 127Automatic Dimming Rearview with

OnStar® and Compass ......................... 128Manual Rearview Mirror with Compass

and Temperature .................................... 14Memory ................................................... 169Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ........... 131Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 131Outside Parallel Park Assist Mirror ........... 131Outside Power Heated Mirrors ................. 130

MP3 ............................................................ 297MyGMLink.com ............................................ 528

NNavigation/Radio System, see

Navigation Manual ................................... 305New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 111Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 518

553

OOdometer .................................................... 243Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 330Oil

Engine ..................................................... 380Pressure Light .......................................... 255Supercharger, Engine ............................... 385

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 383Older Children, Restraints ............................. 38Online Owner Center ................................... 528OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 132Operation, Universal Home Remote

System ............................................ 137, 142Other Warning Devices ................................ 180Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 237Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 228Outside

Automatic Dimming Mirror ........................ 131Convex Mirror .......................................... 131Parallel Park Assist Mirror ........................ 131Power Heated Mirrors .............................. 130

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 395

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 512Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 483Panic Brake Assist ...................................... 327Parade Dimming .......................................... 220Park Aid ...................................................... 226Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 122Shifting Out of ......................................... 124

ParkingAssist ....................................................... 226Brake ....................................................... 121Over Things That Burn ............................ 124

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 245Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 239Passenger Sensing System ........................... 74Passing ....................................................... 330Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 228Door Locks ................................................ 99Electrical System ..................................... 487Inadvertent Battery Saver ......................... 222Lumbar Controls .......................................... 9Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 11Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 112Seat ............................................................ 9

554

Power (cont.)Steering Fluid .......................................... 403Tilt Wheel and Telescopic

Steering Column ................................... 181Windows .................................................. 105

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 37Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............ 99

QQuestions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................... 19

RRadios ........................................................ 280

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 313Care of Your CDs .................................... 313Navigation/Radio System, see

Navigation Manual ................................ 305Radio Personalization ............................... 305Radio with CD ......................................... 282Setting the Time ...................................... 281Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 309Understanding Reception ......................... 312

Rainsense™ II Wipers ................................. 190Reading Lamps ........................................... 221Rear Axle .................................................... 416

Limited-Slip .............................................. 325Rear Climate Control System ...................... 237Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 100Rear Heated Seats ....................................... 14Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 34Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 31Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming ............ 127Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming w

ith OnStar® .............................................. 127Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

OnStar® and Compass ............................. 128Rearview Mirror with Compass and

Temperature ............................................... 14Reclining Seatbacks, Power .......................... 11Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 516Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 355Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................ 466Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 465Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 419Replacement, Windshield ............................. 419

555

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government ............................. 542General Motors ........................................ 542United States Government ....................... 542

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 80Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 81Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 112Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 30Roadside

Service .................................................... 531Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 349Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 519Run-Flat Tires ............................................. 429Running the Engine While Parked ............... 126

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 244Pretensioners ............................................. 37Reminder Light ........................................ 243

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 479Driver Position ........................................... 21How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 20Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 19Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 34Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 31Right Front Passenger Position .................. 30Safety Belt Extender .................................. 37Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 30Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 15Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 29

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 505Seats

Head Restraints ......................................... 13Heated and Ventilated Seats ...................... 11Heated Seats ............................................. 10Heated Seats - Rear .................................. 14Memory ................................................... 169Power Lumbar ............................................. 9Power Reclining Seatbacks ........................ 11Power Seats ................................................ 9

556

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ..................................... 57Right Front Seat Position ........................... 59

Security Light .............................................. 256Service ........................................................ 362

Accessories and Modifications .................. 363Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 365California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 363Doing Your Own Work ............................. 364Engine Soon Light ................................... 252Publications Ordering Information ............. 543

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 78Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 483Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 122Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 124Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 29Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 182Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 475Installing .................................................. 466Removing ................................................ 465Storing ..................................................... 473

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 498Speedometer ............................................... 243

StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 326Starting Your Engine ................................... 113Steering ...................................................... 327Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 310Steering Wheel Controls, Memory ............... 169Steering Wheel, Heated .............................. 181Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and

Telescopic Steering Column ..................... 181Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 146Convenience Net ..................................... 146Cupholder(s) ............................................ 146Glove Box ................................................ 146

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 348Sun Visors .................................................. 107Sunroof ....................................................... 147

TTachometer ................................................. 243TCS Warning Light ...................................... 250Telescopic Steering Column, Power

Tilt Wheel ................................................ 181Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 309Theft-Deterrent System ................................ 108

557

Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 107Time, Setting ............................................... 281Tires ........................................................... 421

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ............................................... 482

Buying New Tires ..................................... 441Chains ..................................................... 447Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 464Cleaning .................................................. 483Compact Spare Tire ................................. 475Different Size ........................................... 443High-Speed Operation .............................. 432If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 451Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 431Inspection and Rotation ............................ 438Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 466Lifting Your Vehicle .................................. 448Pressure Monitor System ......................... 433Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 466Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 465Run-Flat ................................................... 429Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 473Tire Inflator Kit ......................................... 452Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 423

Tires (cont.)Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 426Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 444Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 445Wheel Replacement ................................. 445When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 440Winter Tires ............................................. 422

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 355Towing a Trailer ....................................... 357Your Vehicle ............................................. 355

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 323Control System Warning Light .................. 250Limited-Slip Rear Axle .............................. 325Magnetic Ride Control .............................. 325StabiliTrak® System ................................. 326

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ....................................... 388

Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 116Trunk .......................................................... 101Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 182Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 182Twilight Sentinel® ........................................ 218

558

UUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........ 226Understanding Radio Reception ................... 312Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 444Universal Home Remote System ........ 135, 136

Operation ........................................ 137, 142

VValet Lockout Switch ................................... 110Vehicle

Control ..................................................... 320Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 349Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData Recorders ........................................ 536

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 485Service Parts Identification Label .............. 485

Vehicle Personalization ................................ 148Memory Seat, Mirrors and

Steering Wheel ..................................... 169Ventilated Seats ............................................ 11Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 237Visors .......................................................... 107

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 241Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 264Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 180Other Warning Devices ............................ 180Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 445Different Size ........................................... 443Replacement ............................................ 445

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 48

559

Windows ..................................................... 104Power ...................................................... 105

WindshieldRainsense™ II Wipers ............................. 190Replacement ............................................ 419Washer .................................................... 191Washer Fluid ........................................... 404Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 419Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 481Wiper Fuses ............................................ 486Wipers ..................................................... 189

Winter Driving ............................................. 344Winter Tires ................................................. 422Wiper Activated Headlamps ......................... 215

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 303XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 314

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 503

560

2007 Cadillac STS/STS-V Owner Manual MIndex A good place to quickly locate information about the...

Documents

Transcript of 2007 Cadillac STS/STS-V Owner Manual MIndex A good place to quickly locate information about the...